WO2024018632A1 - Sound control device and sound control program - Google Patents

Sound control device and sound control program Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024018632A1
WO2024018632A1 PCT/JP2022/028520 JP2022028520W WO2024018632A1 WO 2024018632 A1 WO2024018632 A1 WO 2024018632A1 JP 2022028520 W JP2022028520 W JP 2022028520W WO 2024018632 A1 WO2024018632 A1 WO 2024018632A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
song
volume
bpm
frequency band
operator
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2022/028520
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
健太 佐川
七生 ▲高▼城
崇 眞下
Original Assignee
AlphaTheta株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by AlphaTheta株式会社 filed Critical AlphaTheta株式会社
Priority to PCT/JP2022/028520 priority Critical patent/WO2024018632A1/en
Publication of WO2024018632A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024018632A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04RLOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R3/00Circuits for transducers, loudspeakers or microphones

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a sound control device and a sound control program.
  • an audio device that mixes and outputs a plurality of songs is known (for example, see Patent Document 1).
  • the audio device described in Patent Document 1 is a so-called mixer, which mixes music supplied from a music supply device such as a PC and a smartphone, and outputs an audio signal corresponding to the mixed music to a speaker.
  • the audio device includes operators such as a first channel fader, a second channel fader, and a cross fader. Each of the first channel fader and the second channel fader has an operator that can move up and down, and the cross fader has an operator that can move left and right.
  • the audio device adjusts the volume of the music input from the music supply device to the first channel
  • the second channel fader is operated
  • the sound volume is adjusted from the music supply device to the second channel. Adjust the volume of the input song.
  • the audio device adjusts the balance between the volume of the first channel and the volume of the second channel. For example, as the crossfader control is moved to the left, the proportion of the first channel in the volume output from the audio device increases, and as the control is moved to the right, the proportion of the volume output from the audio device increases. The proportion of the second channel in the volume increases.
  • a sound control device is a sound control device for mixing a first music piece and a second music piece, in which the volume of the first music piece and the sound volume of the first music piece are adjusted according to the position of an operator operated by a user.
  • a volume adjustment section that adjusts the balance with the volume of the second song; and a BPM setting section that sets the BPM when playing the first song and the BPM when playing the second song according to the position of the operator.
  • the sound control program according to the second aspect of the present invention is recorded in a computer-readable manner, and causes the computer to function as the sound control device according to the first aspect.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of an acoustic control device in a first embodiment.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a high frequency band adjustment section, a medium frequency band adjustment section, and a low frequency band adjustment section in the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a control unit in the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the volume of the entire first song and changes in the volume of the entire second song when the crossfader is operated in the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the volume level of each frequency band of the first song and changes in the volume level of each frequency band of the second song when the crossfader is operated in the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating changes in the volume of the entire first song when operating the first channel fader and changes in the volume of the entire second song when operating the second channel fader in the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the volume level of each frequency band of the first song and the second song when the crossfader is operated in the assist mode in the second embodiment.
  • the figure which shows the change of the volume level of each frequency band of each of a 1st music and a 2nd music when the set level of the volume of the low frequency band of a 1st music in 2nd embodiment is 0.6.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram showing changes in volume levels in high frequency bands and medium frequency bands.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of changes in the volume levels of the low frequency bands of the first music piece and the second music piece when the first channel fader and the second channel fader are operated in the assist mode in the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a control unit included in the acoustic control device according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of first reproduction control processing in the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of an acoustic control device 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • the sound control device 1 mixes a plurality of songs. Specifically, the audio control device 1 mixes the first music loaded onto the first channel and the second music loaded onto the second channel, and outputs an audio signal corresponding to the mixed music.
  • the sound control device 1 operates in a normal mode in which the first music piece and the second music piece are mixed according to a plurality of operators, and an assist mode in which the mixing of the first music piece and the second music piece is assisted.
  • One of its features is that As shown in FIG.
  • the audio control device 1 includes a housing 2, two channel operation sections 3, a mode changeover switch 4, and a crossfader 5. Although not shown in FIG. 1, the sound control device 1 further includes a control section 6 (see FIG. 3) that controls the operation of the sound control device 1.
  • the housing 2 is formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and accommodates the control unit 6 therein.
  • the housing 2 has a top surface 21, a top surface 22, a bottom surface 23, a left side surface 24, a right side surface 25, and a bottom surface (not shown).
  • Two channel operation sections 3, a mode changeover switch 4, and a cross fader 5 are arranged on the top surface 21.
  • the two channel operation units 3 operate the playback state of music loaded into the corresponding channels.
  • the two channel operation units 3 include a first channel operation unit 3A that operates the playback state of the first song loaded on the first channel, and a first channel operation unit 3A that operates the playback status of the second song loaded on the second channel.
  • This is a 2-channel operation section 3B.
  • Each channel operation section 3A, 3B has a jog dial 31, an equalizer adjustment section 32, a channel fader 33, and a tempo slider 34.
  • the jog dial 31 is rotatably provided on the top surface 21 and is used to adjust the playback direction and playback speed of the music being played. Note that a scratch operation unique to DJ performance is performed by the user combining a change in the rotation direction and a change in rotation speed of the jog dial 31.
  • the equalizer adjustment section 32 performs equalizer adjustment processing for the corresponding channel. Specifically, the equalizer adjustment section 32 of the first channel operation section 3A performs equalizer adjustment processing for the first channel, and the equalizer adjustment section 32 of the second channel operation section 3B performs equalizer adjustment processing for the second channel.
  • Each equalizer adjustment section 32 includes a level adjustment section 321 , a high frequency band adjustment section 322 , a medium frequency band adjustment section 323 , a low frequency band adjustment section 324 , and an effect adjustment section 325 .
  • the level adjustment section 321, the high frequency band adjustment section 322, the medium frequency band adjustment section 323, the low frequency band adjustment section 324, and the effect adjustment section 325 are rotary encoders having knobs that can be rotated in one direction and the other around the rotation axis. .
  • the level adjustment section 321 adjusts the input level of the input music.
  • the effect adjustment section 325 is an operator that adjusts the effect amount of the effect set in the corresponding channel operation section 3.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the high frequency band adjustment section 322, the medium frequency band adjustment section 323, and the low frequency band adjustment section 324.
  • each of the high frequency band adjustment section 322, the medium frequency band adjustment section 323, and the low frequency band adjustment section 324 is arranged at a position indicating "0.5".
  • the high frequency band adjustment section 322 adjusts the volume level of the high frequency band of the input music.
  • the high frequency band is, for example, a frequency band of 4649 Hz or higher.
  • the high frequency band adjustment section 322 adjusts the volume level in a range of 0 or more and 1 or less, as shown in FIG.
  • the volume level set by the high frequency band adjustment section 322 is the set level
  • the set level of the high frequency band becomes 0, and the set level of the high frequency band becomes 0.
  • the set level of the high frequency band becomes 1. That is, when the high frequency band adjustment section 322 is placed at a position pointing to "0", the set level of the high frequency band becomes 0, and when the high frequency band adjustment section 322 is placed at a position pointing to "1", the high frequency band The set level of is 1. Further, when the high frequency band adjustment section 322 is placed at a position pointing to "0.5", the set level of the high frequency band becomes 0.5.
  • the set level of the high frequency band of the first music piece set by the high frequency band adjustment section 322 of the first channel operation section 3A will be referred to as the set level H1lv.
  • the set level of the high frequency band of the second music piece set by the high frequency band adjustment unit 322 of the second channel operation unit 3B is set as the set level H2lv.
  • the set level H1lv is the volume level set by the user using the high frequency band adjustment section 322 of the first channel operation section 3A as the maximum level of the high frequency band of the first song.
  • the set level H2lv is the volume level set by the user using the high frequency band adjustment section 322 of the second channel operation section 3B as the maximum level of the high frequency band of the second music.
  • the minimum volume level of the high frequency band of the first music piece is set as the minimum level H1min
  • the minimum volume level of the high frequency band of the second music piece is set as the minimum level H2min.
  • the minimum level H1min is a value smaller than the set level H1lv
  • the minimum level H2min is a value smaller than the set level H2lv.
  • the minimum levels H1min and H2min are assumed to be 0 for convenience.
  • the medium frequency band adjustment section 323 adjusts the volume level of the medium frequency band of the input music.
  • the medium frequency band is, for example, a frequency band exceeding 284 Hz and below 4649 Hz.
  • the medium frequency band adjustment section 323 adjusts the volume level in a range of 0 or more and 1 or less.
  • the setting of the volume level by the medium frequency band adjustment section 323 is similar to the setting of the volume level by the high frequency band adjustment section 322.
  • the volume level set by the medium frequency band adjustment section 323 will be referred to as the set level.
  • the set level of the middle frequency band of the first song set by the middle frequency band adjustment section 323 of the first channel operation section 3A is referred to as the set level M1lv.
  • the set level of the middle frequency band of the second song set by the middle frequency band adjustment unit 323 of the second channel operation unit 3B is referred to as the set level M2lv.
  • the set level M1lv is the volume level set by the user as the maximum level of the intermediate frequency band of the first song using the intermediate frequency band adjustment section 323 of the first channel operation section 3A.
  • the set level M2lv is the volume level set by the user as the maximum level of the intermediate frequency band of the second music piece using the intermediate frequency band adjustment section 323 of the second channel operation section 3B.
  • the minimum volume level of the intermediate frequency band of the first song is set to the minimum level M1min
  • the minimum volume level of the intermediate frequency band of the second song is set to the minimum level M2min.
  • the minimum level M1min is a value smaller than the set level M1lv
  • the minimum level M2min is a value smaller than the set level M2lv.
  • the minimum levels M1min and M2min are set to 0 for convenience.
  • the low frequency band adjustment section 324 adjusts the volume level of the low frequency band of the input music.
  • the low frequency band is, for example, a frequency band of 284 Hz or less. As shown in FIG. 2, the low frequency band adjustment section 324 adjusts the volume level in a range of 0 or more and 1 or less.
  • the setting of the volume level by the low frequency band adjustment section 324 is similar to the setting of the volume level by the high frequency band adjustment section 322.
  • the volume level set by the low frequency band adjustment section 324 will be referred to as the set level. More specifically, the set level of the low frequency band of the first music piece set by the low frequency band adjustment section 324 of the first channel operation section 3A is referred to as the set level L1lv.
  • the set level of the low frequency band of the second music piece set by the low frequency band adjustment unit 324 of the second channel operation unit 3B is referred to as the set level L2lv.
  • the set level L1lv is the volume level set by the user using the low frequency band adjustment section 324 of the first channel operation section 3A as the maximum level of the low frequency band of the first song.
  • the set level L2lv is the volume level set by the user using the low frequency band adjustment section 324 of the second channel operation section 3B as the maximum level of the low frequency band of the second music piece.
  • the minimum volume level of the low frequency band of the first music piece is set as the minimum level L1min
  • the minimum volume level of the low frequency band of the second music piece is set as the minimum level L2min.
  • the minimum level L1min is a value smaller than the set level L1lv
  • the minimum level L2min is a value smaller than the set level L2lv.
  • the minimum levels L1min and L2min are assumed to be 0 for convenience.
  • the channel fader 33 shown in FIG. 1 is an operator that adjusts the volume output from the corresponding channel operation section 3.
  • the channel fader 33 of the first channel operation section 3A is a first channel fader 33A, and adjusts the volume output from the first channel operation section 3A.
  • the channel fader 33 of the second channel operation section 3B is a second channel fader 33B, and adjusts the volume output from the second channel operation section 3B.
  • Each channel fader 33 has a fader operator 331 that can be slid up and down. When the fader operator 331 is operated upward, a volume adjustment section 65, which will be described later, increases the volume of the entire song output from the corresponding channel operation section 3. When the fader operator 331 is operated downward, the volume adjustment section 65 lowers the volume of the entire song output from the corresponding channel operation section 3.
  • the fader operator 331 of the first channel fader 33A will be referred to as a first operator 33A1
  • the fader operator 331 of the second channel fader 33B will be referred to as a second operator 33B1.
  • the first operator 33A1 adjusts the volume of the entire first music piece loaded onto the first channel
  • the second operator 33B1 adjusts the volume of the entire second music piece loaded onto the second channel.
  • the maximum volume of the entire first music piece is the first set volume set by the first controller 33A1
  • the maximum volume of the entire second music piece is the second set volume set by the second controller 33B1. It's the volume.
  • changing the volume of the entire song according to the position of the fader operator 331 means that the signal in the high frequency band has an intensity that corresponds to the preset level of the high frequency band, and the signal has an intensity that corresponds to the preset level of the medium frequency band.
  • each frequency band is It means increasing or decreasing the volume.
  • the tempo slider 34 shown in FIG. 1 is an operator that adjusts the playback speed of music by adjusting the BPM (Beats Per Minute) during playback of the music loaded on the corresponding channel.
  • BPM Beats Per Minute
  • the BPM of a song represents the tempo of the song, that is, the number of beats per minute of the song.
  • the original BPM of a song refers to the tempo of the original song, that is, the number of beats per minute of the original song
  • the playback BPM refers to the tempo at the time of song playback, that is, the number of beats per minute of the original song. It represents the number of beats per minute.
  • the tempo slider 34 of the first channel operation section 3A is a first tempo slider 34A, and adjusts the BPM during playback of the first music loaded on the first channel.
  • the tempo slider 34 of the second channel operation section 3B is a second tempo slider 34B, and adjusts the BPM during reproduction of the second music loaded on the second channel.
  • the mode changeover switch 4 shown in FIG. 1 is a switch for switching the operation mode of the acoustic control device 1. By pressing the mode changeover switch 4, the operation mode of the acoustic control device 1 is switched between normal mode and assist mode.
  • the crossfader 5 shown in FIG. 1 has a fader operator 51 that can be moved left and right, and the volume of the first song loaded on the first channel is different from the volume of the second song loaded on the second channel. This is an operator that adjusts the balance.
  • the fader operator 51 As the fader operator 51 is moved to the left, the proportion of the volume of the first music piece in the volume output from the audio control device 1 increases.
  • the fader operator 51 As the fader operator 51 is moved to the right, the proportion of the volume of the second music piece in the volume output from the audio control device 1 increases. Specifically, when the fader operator 51 is placed at the left end, the volume of the first song is the maximum, and the volume of the second song is the minimum.
  • the volume of the first song is the minimum, and the volume of the second song is the maximum.
  • one end will be referred to as a first end TC1
  • the other end will be referred to as a second end TC2.
  • the first end TC1 is the left end in the operable range RC
  • the second end TC2 is the right end in the operable range RC. .
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control section 6.
  • the control unit 6 is constituted by a circuit board having at least one processor such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit), and reads and processes an audio control program stored in a computer-readable manner in a storage unit (not shown). That is, the processor that constitutes the control section 6 is a computer, and the control section 6 controls the operation of the sound control device 1 based on a sound control program. Specifically, the control unit 6 not only reproduces the music loaded into each channel, but also adjusts the mix state of the first music and the second music based on operations on the crossfader 5 and channel faders 33A and 33B.
  • the control section 6 includes a first playback section 61, a second playback section 62, a position acquisition section 63, a mode switching section 64, a volume adjustment section 65, and a BPM setting section 66.
  • the first playback section 61 plays back the first song loaded onto the first channel. Specifically, the first playback unit 61 plays the first music piece at a BPM set by a BPM setting unit 66, which will be described later.
  • the second reproduction unit 62 reproduces the second music loaded on the second channel. Specifically, the second reproduction section 62 reproduces the second music at the BPM set by a BPM setting section 66, which will be described later.
  • the BPM of the first song which will be described later, is the adjusted BPM when playing the first song when the BPM when playing the first song is adjusted by the first tempo slider 34A; If the BPM is not adjusted when playing the music, it is the BPM of the original music of the first music.
  • the BPM of the second song which will be described later, is the adjusted BPM when playing back the second song when the second tempo slider 34B adjusts the BPM when playing the second song. If the BPM is not adjusted when the two songs are played, the BPM is the BPM of the original song of the second song.
  • the position acquisition unit 63 acquires the position of each operator. For example, the position acquisition unit 63 determines the position of the fader operator 331 in the operable range of each channel fader 33, the position of each tempo slider 34 in the operable range, and the position of the fader operator 51 in the operable range of the crossfader 5. Get location. To be more specific, the position acquisition unit 63 sets the value to 0 when it is located at a first end TA1 (described later) in the operable range of the first operator 33A1, and sets it to 1 when it is located at a second end TA2 (described later). A numerical value indicating the position of the first operator 33A1 in the case is acquired.
  • the position acquisition unit 63 sets 0 when the second controller 33B1 is located at a first end TB1 (described later) in the operable range, and 1 when the second controller 33B1 is located at a second end TB2 (described later). A numerical value indicating the position of the second operator 33B1 is acquired. In addition, the position acquisition unit 63 sets the position of the fader operator 51 to 0 when it is located at a first end TC1 (described later) and 1 when it is located at a second end TC2 (described later) in the operable range of the fader operator 51. A numerical value indicating the relative position of the fader operator 51 with respect to the first end TC1 is acquired.
  • the mode switching unit 64 switches the operating mode of the acoustic control device 1 between normal mode and assist mode in response to an input operation on the mode selector switch 4.
  • the normal mode is a mode in which the audio control device 1 does not assist when mixing the first music and the second music.
  • the assist mode is a mode in which the sound control device 1 assists in mixing the first music and the second music without causing any discomfort.
  • the volume adjustment unit 65 adjusts the volume of the first music piece to be output from the first channel and the volume to be output from the second channel based on the positions of the fader operator 51 and each operator 33A1, 33B1 acquired by the position acquisition unit 63. In addition to adjusting the volume of the second song played, the balance between the volume of the first song and the volume of the second song is adjusted. Specifically, the volume adjustment section 65 adjusts the balance between the volume of the first song and the volume of the second song according to the position of the fader operator 51.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 adjusts the volume of the first music according to the position of the first operator 33A1 of the first channel fader 33A, and adjusts the volume of the first music according to the position of the second operator 33B1 of the second channel fader 33B. 2 Adjust the volume of the songs. The volume adjustment of each song when the fader operator 51 is operated and the volume adjustment of each song when the operators 33A1 and 33B1 are operated will be described in detail later.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 not only sets the BPM when playing the first music piece played by the first playback unit 61 but also sets the BPM when playing the second music piece played by the second playback unit 62. Specifically, when the operation mode of the sound control device 1 is the normal mode, the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM during playback of the first music piece according to the operation of the first tempo slider 34A, and also sets the BPM when the first music piece is played back. The BPM at the time of reproduction of the second music piece is set according to the operation of the second tempo slider 34B.
  • the BPM setting section 66 sets the BPM for each of the first music piece and the second music piece during playback according to the position of the fader operator 51. Further, when the operation mode of the sound control device 1 is the assist mode, the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM during playback of the first music according to the position of the first operator 33A1, and The BPM at the time of reproduction of the second music is set according to the following. As described above, the first playback section 61 plays the first song at the playback BPM set by the BPM setting section 66, and the second playback section 62 plays the first song at the playback BPM set by the BPM setting section 66. Play the second song.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram showing changes in the volume of the entire first song and changes in the volume of the entire second song when the crossfader 5 is operated.
  • a numerical value indicating the relative position of the fader operator 51 acquired by the position acquisition unit 63 is set on the horizontal axis of the graph.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 adjusts the balance between the volume of the entire first music piece and the volume of the entire second music piece based on the position of the fader operator 51 of the crossfader 5 within the operable range.
  • the volume of the entire first song refers to all the volumes of the first song, including the volume of the high frequency band, the volume of the medium frequency band, and the volume of the low frequency band.
  • the maximum value of the volume of the entire first music piece is the first set volume V1st set by the first operator 33A1.
  • the balance between the high frequency band, medium frequency band, and low frequency band in the first song corresponds to the ratio of the set level H1lv of the high frequency band, the set level M1lv of the middle frequency band, and the set level L1lv of the low frequency band. are doing.
  • the same applies to the volume of the entire second music piece, and the maximum value of the volume of the entire second music piece is the second set volume V2st set by the second operator 33B1.
  • the balance between the high frequency band, medium frequency band, and low frequency band in the second song corresponds to the ratio of the set level H2lv of the high frequency band, the set level M2lv of the middle frequency band, and the set level L2lv of the low frequency band. are doing. Note that the direction from the first end TC1 to the second end TC2 is the +DC direction, and the direction from the second end TC2 to the first end TC1 is the -DC direction.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 sets the volume of the entire first song to the above-mentioned first set volume V1st, as shown in FIG.
  • the overall volume is set to the second minimum volume V2min.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 decreases the volume of the entire first music piece and increases the volume of the entire second music piece as the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction from the first end TC1.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 increases the volume of the entire first song and decreases the volume of the entire second song as the fader operator 51 is operated from the second end TC2 in the ⁇ DC direction.
  • the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction, the ratio of the second music piece to the volume output from the audio control device 1 increases.
  • the fader operator 51 is operated in the ⁇ DC direction, the ratio of the first music piece to the volume output from the audio control device 1 increases.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 sets the volume of the entire first music piece to a first minimum volume V1min, and sets the volume of the entire second music piece to the second setting as described above.
  • the volume is set to V2st. In this way, the volume of the entire first music piece and the volume of the entire second music piece are adjusted according to the position of the fader operator 51 in the operable range RC. Then, by operating the fader operator 51 from the first end TC1 to the second end TC2, the output music is switched from the first music to the second music. By operating the fader operator 51 from the second end TC2 to the first end TC1, the output music is switched from the second music to the first music.
  • the volume level of each frequency band of each song when the crossfader 5 is operated will be explained.
  • the volume of the entire song is determined by a high frequency band signal with a strength corresponding to the preset level of the high frequency band, a medium frequency band signal with a strength corresponding to the preset level of the medium frequency band, and a low frequency band signal with a strength corresponding to the preset level of the medium frequency band. It is determined by amplifying a signal in a low frequency band whose intensity corresponds to the preset level of , with an amplification factor corresponding to the position of the fader operator 331 . In other words, if the position of the fader operator 331 is not changed, by changing the volume level of each frequency band with the set level as the upper limit, the overall volume of each song, and by extension the volume balance of each song, is adjusted. Ru.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram showing changes in the volume level of each frequency band of the first song and changes in the volume level of each frequency band of the second song when the crossfader 5 is operated.
  • the first row from the top of FIG. 5 shows the position of the fader operator 51
  • the second row shows the volume level of each high frequency band of the first song and the second song.
  • the third row from the top of FIG. 5 shows the volume level of the medium frequency band of each song
  • the fourth row shows the volume level of the low frequency band of each song. Note that on the horizontal axes of the graphs shown in the second, third, and fourth rows of FIG. 5, numerical values indicating the relative positions of the fader operators 51 described above are set.
  • the set level H1lv and the set level H2lv are shown as the same value in FIG. 5, the set level H1lv and the set level H2lv do not necessarily have to be the same value.
  • the same goes for the set levels M1lv and M2lv, and the same goes for the set levels L1lv and L2lv.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 adjusts the overall volume of each song as shown in FIG. 4 by changing the volume level of each frequency band of each song according to the position of the fader operator 51. Adjust.
  • the volume level of the high frequency band of the second music piece is varied within the range of the minimum level H1min to above the preset level H1lv, and the volume level of the high frequency band of the second song is varied within the range of the minimum level H2min to below the preset level H2lv. That is, as the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction from the first end TC1, the volume adjustment section 65 increases the volume level of the high frequency band of the first music piece from the minimum level H1min to the preset level H1lv as the upper limit. At the same time, the volume level of the high frequency band of the second music is lowered from the set level H2lv to the minimum level H2min as the lower limit.
  • the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song is varied within the range of the minimum level L1min or more and the preset level L1lv or less, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song is changed within the range of the minimum level L1min or more and the preset level L1lv or less.
  • the volume level of the frequency band is changed in the range of the minimum level M2min or more and the preset level M2lv or less, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song is changed in the range of the minimum level L2min or more and the preset level L2lv or less.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 increases the volume level of the medium frequency band of the first song from the minimum level M1min to the preset level M1lv as the upper limit. At the same time, the volume level of the middle frequency band of the second song is lowered from the set level M2lv to the minimum level M2min as the lower limit. In addition, as the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction from the first end TC1, the volume adjustment section 65 increases the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song from the minimum level L1min to the preset level L1lv as the upper limit.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 adjusts the volume level of each frequency band of each song between the minimum level and the preset level according to the position of the fader operator 51, thereby adjusting the volume of the first song. and the volume of the second song are adjusted, and the volume balance of each song is adjusted.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change in BPM during reproduction of the first music piece and the second music piece in the assist mode.
  • FIG. 6 shows the results of the first and second songs when the crossfader 5 is operated in assist mode when the BPM of the first song is 100 and the BPM of the second song is 120. It is a figure which shows the change of BPM at the time of each reproduction
  • the BPM setting section 66 sets the BPM of each song during playback according to the position of the fader operator 51, as shown in FIG. 6, when the operation mode of the audio control device 1 is the assist mode.
  • the setting of BPM during playback by the BPM setting section 66 in the assist mode will be explained.
  • the BPM setting section 66 changes the BPM of each song so that the BPM of the first song approaches the BPM of the second song. Set the BPM when playing. Then, when the fader operator 51 is placed at the second end TC2, the BPM setting section 66 sets the BPM of the second song as the BPM during playback of each song. In the example of FIG. 6, the BPM during playback of each song is set to 120. As the fader operator 51 is operated in the -DC direction from the second end TC2 to the first end TC1, the BPM setting section 66 changes the BPM of each song so that the BPM of the second song approaches the BPM of the first song.
  • the BPM setting section 66 sets the BPM of each song during playback to the BPM of the first song.
  • the playback BPM of each song is set to 100, which is the BPM of the first song.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM of each song during playback to an intermediate value between the BPM of the first song and the BPM of the second song. do.
  • the rate of change in BPM during reproduction when the fader operator 51 is operated in the ⁇ DC direction is constant in the example of FIG. 6, it may not be constant.
  • the rate of change may change as the fader operator 51 is operated in the ⁇ DC direction. In this way, depending on the operation of the fader operator 51, it is possible to easily align the BPM of each piece of music to be mixed during playback. Therefore, each song can be mixed naturally without any discomfort.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the volume of the entire first song when the first channel fader 33A is operated, and changes in the volume of the entire second song when the second channel fader 33B is operated.
  • numerical values indicating the relative positions of the respective operators 33A1 and 33B1 are set on the vertical axis of the left graph.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 adjusts the volume of the entire first music piece based on the position of the first operator 33A1 of the first channel fader 33A, and adjusts the volume of the entire first music piece based on the position of the first operator 33A1 of the first channel fader 33A. Based on the position of 33B1, the volume of the entire second music piece is adjusted.
  • the volume adjustment unit 65 sets the first set volume V1st, which is the volume of the entire first music piece, between the first minimum volume V1min and the first maximum volume V1max based on the position of the first controller 33A1. do.
  • the volume adjustment unit 65 sets a second set volume V2st, which is the volume of the entire second music piece, between the second minimum volume V2min and the second maximum volume V2max based on the position of the second operator 33B1.
  • the first maximum volume V1max is the maximum volume of the entire first song that can be output from the audio control device 1
  • the second maximum volume V2max is the maximum volume of the entire second song that can be output from the audio control device 1. be.
  • first end TA1 first end
  • second end TA2 second end
  • the direction from the first end TA1 to the second end TA2 is the +DA direction
  • the direction from the second end TA2 to the first end TA1 is the -DA direction
  • one end of the operable range RB of the second operator 33B1 is defined as a first end TB1
  • the other end is defined as a second end TB2.
  • the direction from the first end TB1 to the second end TB2 is the +DB direction
  • the direction from the second end TB2 to the first end TB1 is the -DB direction.
  • the first ends TA1 and TB1 are the lower ends of the operable ranges RA and RB
  • the second ends TA2 and TB2 are the lower ends of the operable ranges RA and RB. This is the upper end of RA and RB.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 sets the first set volume V1st to the first minimum volume V1min, as shown in FIG. As a result, the volume of the entire first music piece becomes the first minimum volume V1min.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 changes the first set volume V1st. That is, when the first operator 33A1 is operated in the +DA direction, the volume adjustment unit 65 increases the first set volume V1st, and when the first operator 33A1 is operated in the -DA direction, the volume adjustment unit 65 increases the first set volume V1st. The completed volume V1st is decreased.
  • the rate of change in the overall volume of the first song is constant, and the amount of movement of the first controller 33A1, the amount of change in the first set volume V1st, and the amount of change in the overall volume of the first song are is directly proportional.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the rate of change of the first preset volume V1st and the rate of change of the volume of the entire first music piece may not be constant; for example, the first controller 33A1 may move in the +DA direction or -DA direction. It may change as it is operated.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 sets the first set volume V1st to the first maximum volume V1max. As a result, the volume of the entire first music piece becomes the first maximum volume V1max.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 sets the second set volume V2st to the second minimum volume V2min. As a result, the volume of the entire second music piece becomes the second minimum volume V2min.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 changes the second set volume V2st when the second operator 33B1 is operated. That is, when the second operator 33B1 is operated in the +DB direction, the volume adjustment section 65 increases the second set volume V2st according to the position of the second operator 33B1, thereby increasing the volume of the entire second music piece. Increase volume.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 lowers the second set volume according to the position of the second operator 33B1, thereby controlling the entire second music piece. Decrease volume.
  • the rate of change of the second set volume V2st and the rate of change of the volume of the entire second music piece are constant in the example shown in FIG. 7, they do not need to be constant.
  • the rate of change of the second set volume V2st and the rate of change of the volume of the second music as a whole may be different, and change as the second operator 33B1 is operated in the +DA direction or -DA direction. You can.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 sets the second set volume V2st to the second maximum volume V2max.
  • the volume of the entire second music piece becomes the second maximum volume V2max. Therefore, for example, from a state in which the first operator 33A1 is arranged at the second end TA2 and the second operator 33B1 is arranged at the first end TB1, the first operator 33A1 is operated in the -DA direction, By operating the second operator 33B1 in the +DB direction, the music output from the audio control device 1 can be replaced from the first music to the second music.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change in BPM during playback of each of the first song and the second song in the assist mode.
  • FIG. 8 shows a state in which the first music piece is played when the first operator 33A1 is operated in assist mode when the BPM of the first music piece is 100 and the BPM of the second music piece is 120. It is a figure explaining the change of BPM, and the change of BPM at the time of reproduction
  • the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM during playback of the first music according to the position of the first operator 33A1, as shown in FIG.
  • the BPM at the time of reproduction of the second music piece is set according to the position of the operator 33B1.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM of the first music piece and the second music piece according to the division result obtained by dividing the numerical value indicating the position of the first operator 33A1 by the numerical value indicating the position of the second operator 33B1. Set the BPM for each playback.
  • the storage unit (not shown) stores the graph shown in FIG. 8 in advance. That is, the storage unit stores BPM change information indicating the BPM corresponding to the numerical value of the division result. Specifically, the storage unit stores, as BPM change information, a function that approaches the BPM of the second song as the numerical value of the division result becomes smaller, and approaches the BPM of the first song as the numerical value of the division result increases. .
  • the function stored in the storage unit as BPM change information may be a linear function as shown in FIG. 8, or may be a high-order function such as a quadratic function.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 adjusts the volume of the entire first music piece based on the position of the first controller 33A1, and adjusts the volume of the entire second music piece based on the position of the second controller 33B1. ing. Therefore, instead of the BPM change information, the storage unit (not shown) stores BPM change information indicating the BPM corresponding to the numerical value of the division result obtained by dividing the volume of the entire first song by the volume of the entire second song. You can.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 acquires the BPM corresponding to the above-mentioned division result, and sets the acquired BPM as the BPM of each song. Therefore, for example, if the first operator 33A1 is arranged at the first end TA1 and the second operator 33B1 is arranged at the second end TB2, the BPM setting section 66 Let the BPM at the time of each reproduction be the BPM of the second music piece. In the example of FIG. 8, the playback BPM of each song is set to 120, which is the BPM of the second song.
  • the BPM setting section 66 sets the first music piece and the second music piece.
  • the BPM of each playback be the BPM of the first music piece.
  • the playback BPM of each song is set to 100, which is the BPM of the first song.
  • the BPM of each song approaches the BPM of the first song. Furthermore, as the first operator 33A1 is operated in the -DA direction or as the second operator 33B1 is operated in the +DB direction, the BPM of each song approaches the BPM of the second song.
  • the assist mode is useful not only for the above-mentioned inexperienced users but also for experienced users.
  • the sound control device 1 mixes the first music and the second music.
  • the sound control device 1 includes a volume adjustment section 65 and a BPM setting section 66.
  • the volume adjustment unit 65 adjusts the volume of the first music piece and the volume of the second music piece according to the position of at least one of the fader operator 51, the first operator 33A1, and the second operator 33B1 operated by the user. Adjust the balance with the volume.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM when playing the first music and the BPM when playing the second music according to the position of the operator.
  • the volume control unit 65 adjusts the volume control unit 65 to the first level as the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction from the first end TC1 to the second end TC2 in the operable range RC of the fader operator 51.
  • the volume of the song is decreased and the volume of the second song is increased.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM and the second BPM during playback of the first music piece as the fader operator 51 is operated in the direction from the first end TC1 to the second end TC2 in the operable range of the fader operator 51. To bring the BPM of a first piece of music closer to the BPM of a second piece of music when playing music.
  • the volume of the first music can be decreased by operating the fader operator 51 in the +DC direction.
  • the BPM of the first song and the BPM of the second song can be brought closer to the BPM of the second song whose volume increases. Therefore, the first music and the second music can be easily mixed without any discomfort.
  • the volume adjustment unit 65 sets the volume of the entire first song to the minimum volume V1min, and sets the volume of the entire second song to the second setting.
  • the completed volume is set to V2st.
  • the second set volume V2st is the maximum volume of the entire second music piece set by the second operator 33B1.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM of the first music piece and the BPM of the second music piece to the BPM of the second music piece.
  • the BPM of the second song is set as the BPM when the second song is played at which the volume becomes the second preset volume V2st. Can be set. Therefore, when replacing the first song with the second song, the second song can be played back at the BPM of the second song.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 sets each of the BPM during playback of the first music piece and the BPM during playback of the second music piece. Set to an intermediate value between the BPM of the first song and the BPM of the second song. According to such a configuration, it is possible for the user to easily grasp the position where the playback BPM of the first music piece and the playback BPM of the second music piece are the intermediate value in the operable range of the fader operator 51. . Therefore, the operator can be easily operated when adjusting the BPM during playback.
  • the operator operated by the user is the crossfader 5 having a slideable fader operator 51.
  • the fader operator 51 by operating the fader operator 51, the first music and the second music can be mixed without any discomfort. Therefore, the mixing operation between the first and second songs is easier than when operating the operator that adjusts the BPM when playing the first song and the operator that adjusts the BPM when playing the second song. can be implemented.
  • the sound control program executed by the arithmetic processing unit which is a computer constituting the control unit 6, is recorded in a computer-readable manner, and causes the computer to function as the sound control device 1 described above.
  • the sound control device has the same configuration as the sound control device 1 according to the first embodiment, but the operation of the volume adjustment section when the operation mode is the assist mode is different.
  • parts that are the same or substantially the same as parts that have already been described are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.
  • FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a control section 6A included in the acoustic control device according to the present embodiment.
  • the sound control device according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and structure as the sound control device 1 according to the first embodiment, except that it includes a control section 6A shown in FIG. 9 instead of the control section 6 according to the first embodiment. Equipped with functions.
  • the control unit 6A controls the audio control device according to the present embodiment, and includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit), etc. that reads and executes an audio control program stored in a storage unit (not shown). Configured with 1 processor. That is, the arithmetic processing circuit is a computer.
  • a CPU Central Processing Unit
  • the control section 6A has the same configuration as the control section 6 except that it includes a volume adjustment section 65A instead of the volume adjustment section 65 according to the first embodiment. That is, the control section 6A includes a first playback section 61, a second playback section 62, a position acquisition section 63, a mode switching section 64, a volume adjustment section 65A, and a BPM setting section 66.
  • the volume adjustment section 65A functions similarly to the volume adjustment section 65 according to the first embodiment.
  • the volume adjustment unit 65A adjusts the volume of each of the high frequency band and the medium frequency band of the first music, and the volume of the first music.
  • the volume of the low frequency band of one song is individually adjusted, and the volume of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the second song, and the volume of the low frequency band of the second song are individually adjusted.
  • the volume adjustment section 65A adjusts the volume level of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the first song, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song, thereby adjusting the volume level of the first song. Adjust the volume of each frequency band individually.
  • the volume adjustment unit 65A adjusts the volume level of each frequency band of the second music by individually adjusting the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the second music and the volume level of the low frequency band of the second music. Adjust the volume individually.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram showing changes in the volume level of each frequency band of the first song and changes in the volume level of each frequency band of the second song when the crossfader 5 is operated in the assist mode.
  • numerical values indicating the relative positions of the fader operators 51 described above are set.
  • the set level H1lv and the set level H2lv are shown as the same value, but the set level H1lv and the set level H2lv do not necessarily have to be the same value. The same goes for the set levels M1lv and M2lv, and the same goes for the set levels L1lv and L2lv.
  • the operable range RC of the fader operator 51 includes a first range RC1, a second range RC2, and a third range RC3, as shown in FIG.
  • the first range RC1 is a range between the first position PC1 and the second position PC2.
  • the second position PC2 is set in the +DC direction with respect to the first position PC1.
  • the second range RC2 is a range between the second position PC2 and the third position PC3.
  • the third position PC3 is set in the +DC direction with respect to the second position PC2.
  • the third range RC3 is a range between the third position PC3 and the fourth position PC4.
  • the fourth position PC4 is set in the +DC direction with respect to the third position PC3.
  • the first position PC1 is set at the first end TC1
  • the fourth position PC4 is set at the second end TC2.
  • the first range RC1 is 1/3 of the operable range RC from the first end TC1
  • the second range RC2 is 1/3 of the operable range RC from the second position PC2.
  • the third range RC3 is 1/3 of the operable range RC from the third position PC3.
  • the volume adjustment section 65A adjusts the volume level of each wavelength band of the first music, as shown in FIG.
  • the set levels of each frequency band of the first song be H1lv, M1lv, L1lv
  • the volume level of each wavelength band of the second song be the minimum level of each frequency band of the second song H2min, M2min, L2min.
  • the volume adjustment section 65A sets the volume level of each wavelength band of the first music to the set levels H1lv, M1lv, L1lv, and while keeping the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song at the minimum level L2min, as the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction, the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the second song is adjusted. increase. That is, the volume level that changes in the first range RC1 is the volume level of the high frequency band and the volume level of the middle frequency band of the second music piece.
  • the volume level of the high frequency band of the second song is changed in the range from the minimum level H2min of the high frequency band of the second song to the preset level H2lv.
  • the volume level of the intermediate frequency band of the second song is changed in the range from the minimum level M2min of the intermediate frequency band of the second song to the preset level M2lv.
  • the volume adjustment section 65A sets the volume level of each frequency band of the first music to the set levels H1lv, M1lv, L1lv, and sets the volume level of each frequency band of the first music to the low frequency band of the second music. While keeping the volume level of the second song at the minimum level L2min, the volume level of the high frequency band of the second song is set to a preset level H2lv, and the volume level of the middle frequency band of the second song is set to a preset level M2lv.
  • the volume adjustment section 65A sets the volume level of the high frequency band of the first music to the preset level H1lv,
  • the volume level of the middle frequency band of the song is set to the set level M1lv
  • the volume level of the high frequency band of the second song is set to the set level H2lv
  • the volume level of the middle frequency band of the second song is set to the set level M2lv
  • the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song is decreased from the set level L1lv
  • the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song is increased from the minimum level L2min.
  • the volume level that changes in the second range RC2 is the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song and the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song.
  • the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song is changed in the range from the minimum level L1min of the low frequency band of the first song to the preset level L1lv.
  • the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song is changed in the range from the minimum level L2min of the low frequency band of the second song to the preset level L2lv.
  • the set level L1lv of the low frequency band of the first music and the set level L2lv of the low frequency band of the second music are the same, and the minimum level L1min of the low frequency band of the first music and the low frequency of the second music
  • the minimum band level L2min is the same
  • the volume adjustment section 65A adjusts the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song and the second song. Match the volume level of the low frequency band.
  • the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song and the The magnitude relationships between the volume levels of the low frequency bands of the two songs are swapped, and in turn, the magnitude relationships between the volume levels of the low frequency bands of each song are swapped. That is, when the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction with respect to the center position of the second range RC2, the volume of the low frequency band of the second song becomes larger than the volume of the low frequency band of the first song.
  • the fader operator 51 when the fader operator 51 is operated in the -DC direction with respect to the center position of the second range RC2, the volume of the low frequency band of the first song becomes larger than the volume of the low frequency band of the second song. .
  • the center position in the second range RC2 coincides with the center position in the operable range RC.
  • the volume level change rate of the low frequency band of the first song and the volume level change rate of the low frequency band of the second song in the second range RC2 are constant. Therefore, when the fader operator 51 is operated from the second position PC2 in the +DC direction, the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song decreases at a constant rate, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song decreases at a constant rate. Levels increase at a constant rate. Furthermore, when the fader operator 51 is operated from the third position PC3 in the -DC direction, the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song increases at a constant rate, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song increases. The level decreases at a constant rate.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the volume level change rate of the low frequency band of the first song and the volume level change rate of the low frequency band of the second song in the second range RC2 may not be constant.
  • the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song may be lowered in a predetermined curve shape, and the low frequency band of the second song
  • the volume level of the band may be increased in a predetermined curve. That is, the rate of change in the volume level of the low frequency band of each song may change according to the operation of the fader operator 51.
  • the volume adjustment section 65A sets the volume level of the high frequency band of the first song to the set level H1lv, and sets the volume level of the middle frequency band of the first song.
  • the volume level of the high frequency band of the second song is set to the set level H2lv
  • the volume level of the middle frequency band of the second song is set to the set level M2lv
  • the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song is set to the set level M1lv. is set as the minimum level L1min
  • the volume level of the low frequency band of the second music piece is set as the set level L2lv.
  • the volume adjustment section 65A sets the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song to the minimum level L1min, and sets the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song to the minimum level L1min, With the volume levels of the high frequency band, medium frequency band, and low frequency band set at the preset levels H2lv, M2lv, and L2lv, as the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction, the volume level of the high frequency band of the first song increases. is lowered from the set level H1lv, and the volume level of the middle frequency band of the first song is lowered from the set level M1lv.
  • the volume level that changes in the third range RC3 is the volume level of the high frequency band and the volume level of the middle frequency band of the first song.
  • the volume level of the high frequency band of the first song is changed in the range from the minimum level H1min of the high frequency band of the first song to the preset level H1lv.
  • the volume level of the intermediate frequency band of the first song is changed in a range from the minimum level M1min of the intermediate frequency band of the first song to the preset level M1lv.
  • the volume adjustment section 65A adjusts the high frequency band and medium frequency of the first song.
  • the respective volume levels of the band and low frequency band are set to minimum levels H1min, M1min, and L1min, and the respective volume levels of the high frequency band, medium frequency band, and low frequency band of the second song are set levels H2lv, M2lv, L2lv. .
  • the volume of the entire first song becomes the first minimum volume V1min
  • the volume of the entire second song becomes the second set volume V2st
  • the mixing from the first song to the second song is completed.
  • the minimum levels H1min, M1min, L1min, H2min, M2min, and L2min of each wavelength band are set to 0 for convenience.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the minimum levels H1min, M1min, L1min, H2min, M2min, and L2min may not be 0.
  • the minimum levels H1min, M1min, L1min, H2min, M2min, and L2min may be set according to the values of the set levels H1lv, M1lv, L1lv, H2lv, M2lv, and L2lv.
  • the minimum level H1min is set to 0, and the set level H1lv exceeds 0.5 and is 1 or less.
  • the minimum level H1min may be a value obtained by subtracting 0.5 from the set level H1lv.
  • FIG. 11 shows each frequency band of the first music when the set level L1lv of the low frequency band of the first music is 0.6 and the set level L2lv of the low frequency band of the second music is 0.5.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram showing changes in the volume level of the second song and changes in the volume level of each frequency band of the second song.
  • the level may be set to 0.1. Even in such a case, by operating the fader operator 51, the volume of the first music piece and the volume of the second music piece can be switched.
  • the volume of the low frequency band of the first song and the low frequency band of the second song can be adjusted regardless of the volume of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of each song. You can change the volume. Note that the difference between the set level and the minimum level is not limited to 0.5, and can be changed as appropriate.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating another example of a change in BPM during playback of each of the first music piece and the second music piece in the assist mode.
  • FIG. 13 shows the change in BPM during playback of each song when the crossfader 5 is operated in assist mode when the BPM of the first song is 100 and the BPM of the second song is 120. It is a figure which shows another example. Note that on the horizontal axis of the graph shown in FIG. 12, a numerical value indicating the relative position of the fader operator 51 described above is set.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 changes the BPM of each song during playback in the same way throughout the operable range RC in accordance with the operation of the fader operator 51.
  • the present invention is not limited thereto; for example, as shown in FIG. Accordingly, the BPM during playback of each of the first music piece and the second music piece may be adjusted.
  • the BPM setting section 66 sets the BPM of the first music and the second music at the time of playback of each of the first music and the second music.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM in the range between the BPM of the first song and the intermediate value between the BPM of the first song and the BPM of the second song.
  • the BPM of each piece of music is set. In the example of FIG.
  • the BPM of the first song is 100
  • the intermediate value between the BPM of the first song and the BPM of the second song is 110
  • the fader operator 51 is arranged in the first range RC1. If so, the BPM during playback of each song is set to a value greater than 100 and less than 110.
  • the BPM setting section 66 sets the BPM during playback of each of the first music piece and the second music piece to the above-mentioned intermediate value. Set to .
  • the BPM during playback of each song is set to 110.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM of the first song according to the position of the fader operator 51 in the range between the above-mentioned intermediate value and the BPM of the second song. and the BPM at the time of reproduction of each of the second songs.
  • the BPM of the second song is 120, so the BPM of each song during playback is set to a value greater than 110 and less than 120.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM of each of the first music and the second music at the time of playback to the BPM of the second music. do.
  • the BPM during playback of each song is set to 120. Note that although the rate of change in BPM during reproduction in the first range RC1 and the third range RC3 is constant in the example of FIG. 12, it does not have to be constant. For example, the rate of change may change as the fader operator 51 is operated in the ⁇ DC direction.
  • the BPM setting section 66 adjusts the volume level of the high frequency band and medium frequency band according to the operation of the fader operator 51 by the volume adjustment section 65. You can adjust the BPM when playing music. Therefore, each song can be mixed naturally without any discomfort.
  • volume adjustment when operating the channel fader in assist mode [Volume adjustment when operating the channel fader in assist mode]
  • the volume adjustment of each song by the volume adjustment section 65A when the operation mode of the audio control device is the assist mode and the operators 33A1 and 33B1 of the respective channel faders 33A and 33B are operated will be described.
  • the content of the BPM settings at the time of playback by the BPM setting unit 66 of each song when operating each of the operators 33A1 and 33B1 in the assist mode is the same as that at the time of playback of each song by the BPM setting unit 66 described in the first embodiment.
  • the settings are the same as those for BPM.
  • the volume adjustment section 65A adjusts the volume of each frequency band of the first music according to the range in which the first operator 33A1 is located in the operable range RA. Further, when the operation mode of the sound control device 1 is the assist mode, the volume adjustment section 65 adjusts the volume of each frequency band of the second music according to the range in which the second operator 33B1 is located in the operable range RB. Adjust.
  • FIG. 13 shows changes in the volume level of the high frequency band and the volume level of the medium frequency band of the first song when operating each channel fader 33A, 33B in assist mode, and the volume level and volume level of the high frequency band of the second song.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram showing changes in volume level in a medium frequency band.
  • the volume adjustment unit 65A adjusts the volume level of each frequency band of the first music according to the range in which the first operator 33A1 is located in the operable range RA. to adjust the volume of the first song.
  • the volume adjustment unit 65A adjusts the volume level of each frequency band of the second music according to the range in which the second operator 33B1 is located in the operable range RB. to adjust the volume of the second song.
  • a predetermined position between the first end TA1 and the second end TA2 in the operable range RA of the first operator 33A1 is defined as a position PA1.
  • the position PA1 can be set at 1 ⁇ 3 of the operable range RA from the second end TA2.
  • the range from the first end TA1 to the position PA1 is defined as a first range RA1, and the range from the position PA1 to the second end TA2 is defined as a second range RA2.
  • a predetermined position between the first end TB1 and the second end TB2 is defined as a position PB1.
  • the position PB1 can be set to 1 ⁇ 3 of the operable range RB from the second end TB2.
  • the range from the first end TB1 to the position PB1 is defined as a first range RB1
  • the range from the position PB1 to the second end TB2 is defined as a second range RB2.
  • the volume adjustment unit 65A adjusts the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the first music according to the position of the first operator 33A1 in the first range RA1, and Depending on the position of the second operator 33B1 in the range RB1, the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the second music is adjusted.
  • the first set volume V1st is set in advance based on the position of the first controller 33A1
  • the second set volume V2st is set in advance based on the position of the second controller 33B1. shall be.
  • the first set volume V1st can be set to a volume corresponding to the position of the first operator 33A1 when the mode changeover switch 4 is pressed and the mode changeover section 64 switches the operation mode to the assist mode.
  • the second set volume V2st can be set to a volume corresponding to the position of the second operator 33B1 when the mode changeover switch 4 is pressed and the mode changeover section 64 switches the operation mode to the assist mode.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the first set volume V1st may be set in advance by other methods or other operators. The same applies to the second set volume V2st.
  • the volume adjustment section 65A sets the volume level of each of the high frequency band, medium frequency band, and low frequency band of the first music to the minimum level H1min, M1min and L1min are set, and the volume of the entire first music piece is set to the first minimum volume V1min.
  • the volume adjustment section 65A adjusts the low frequency band of the first music, although not shown in FIG. As shown in FIG.
  • the volume level of the high frequency band of the first song is changed between the minimum level H1min and the preset level H1lv according to the position of the first controller 33A1, while keeping the volume level of the first music piece at the minimum level L1min.
  • the volume level of the middle frequency band of the first music piece is adjusted between the minimum level M1min and the preset level M1lv. That is, when the first operator 33A1 is operated in the +DA direction in the first range RA1, the volume adjustment section 65A increases the volume level of each of the high frequency band and the medium frequency band of the first song, and increases the volume level in the -DA direction. When operated, the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the first song is reduced.
  • the volume of the entire first song changes.
  • the rate of change in the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the first song is constant, but it does not have to be constant.
  • each rate of change may change as the first operator 33A1 is operated in the ⁇ DA direction.
  • the volume adjustment unit 65 sets the volume level of the high frequency band of the first music while keeping the volume level of the low frequency band of the first music at the minimum level L1min.
  • the level is set to H1lv
  • the volume level of the middle frequency band of the first song is set to the set level M1lv.
  • the volume adjustment unit 65A sets the volume level of each of the high frequency band, medium frequency band, and low frequency band of the second music to the minimum level H2min, M2min and L2min are set, and the volume of the entire second music piece is set to the second minimum volume V2min.
  • the volume adjustment section 65A adjusts the low frequency band of the second music, although not shown in FIG. As shown in FIG.
  • the volume level of the high frequency band of the second song is changed from the minimum level H2min to the preset level H2lv depending on the position of the second controller 33B1, while keeping the volume level of the second music set at the minimum level L2min.
  • the volume level of the middle frequency band of the second music piece is adjusted between the minimum level M2min and the preset level M2lv. That is, when the second operator 33B1 is operated in the +DB direction in the first range RB1, the volume adjustment section 65A increases the volume level of each of the high frequency band and the medium frequency band of the second song, and increases the volume level in the -DB direction. When operated, the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the second music is reduced.
  • the volume of the entire first song changes.
  • the rate of change in the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the second song is constant, but it does not have to be constant.
  • each rate of change may change as the second operator 33B1 is operated in the ⁇ DB direction.
  • the volume adjustment unit 65 sets the volume level of the high frequency band of the second music while keeping the volume level of the low frequency band of the second music at the minimum level L2min.
  • the level is set to H2lv
  • the volume level of the middle frequency band of the second song is set to the set level M2lv.
  • the volume adjustment unit 65A adjusts the first music from the minimum level L1min to the preset level L1lv according to the position of the first operator 33A1 in the second range RA2 and the position of the second operator 33B1 in the second range RB2.
  • the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song is adjusted between the minimum level L2min and the preset level L2lv.
  • the volume adjustment unit 65A controls the first The numerical value indicating the position of the operator 33A1 and the numerical value indicating the position of the second operator 33B1 are converted.
  • the volume adjustment unit 65A sets the acquired numerical value indicating the position of the first operator 33A1 to 0 when the first operator 33A1 is located at the position PA1, and sets the value to 0 when the first operator 33A1 is located at the position PA1, and sets the value indicating the position of the first operator 33A1 to 0 at the second end TA2. It is converted into a numerical value that becomes 1 when the child 33A1 is located.
  • the volume adjustment unit 65A sets the obtained numerical value indicating the position of the second operator 33B1 to 0 when the second operator 33B1 is located at the position PB1, and sets the value to 0 when the second operator 33B1 is located at the position PB1, and sets the value to 0 when the second operator 33B1 is located at the position PB1, Convert to a numerical value that becomes 1 when 33B1 is located.
  • the volume control unit 65A divides the converted numerical value indicating the position of the first operator 33A1 by the converted numerical value indicating the position of the second operator 33B1, and obtains the numerical value of the division result. Thereafter, the volume adjustment unit 65A obtains the volume level of the first music piece and the volume level of the second music piece that correspond to the numerical value of the division result.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a change in the volume level of the low frequency band of each of the first music piece and the second music piece when the first operator 33A1 and the second operator 33B1 are operated in the assist mode.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating the contents of level change information stored in a storage section (not shown).
  • the storage unit (not shown) stores the graph shown in FIG. 14 in advance. That is, the storage unit stores level change information indicating the volume level of the low frequency band of each song corresponding to the numerical value of the division result.
  • the storage unit stores, as level change information indicating the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song, the smaller the numerical value of the division result approaches the minimum level L1min, and the larger the numerical value of the division result, the preset level.
  • a function that approaches L1lv is memorized.
  • the storage unit also stores, as level change information indicating the volume level of the low frequency band of the second music, the smaller the numerical value of the division result, the closer to the set level L2lv, and the larger the numerical value of the division result, the lower the set level L2min. It remembers the function it approaches.
  • the function stored in the storage unit as the level change information may be a linear function as shown in FIG. 14, or may be a high-order function such as a quadratic function.
  • the volume adjustment unit 65A acquires the volume level of the low frequency band of each song, and sets the volume level of the low frequency band of each song to the acquired volume level. Note that when the respective operators 33A1 and 33B1 are arranged in the second ranges RA2 and RB2, the respective volume levels of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the first music are set levels H1lv and M1lv, The respective volume levels of the high frequency band and medium frequency band are set levels H2lv and M2lv.
  • the volume change of each song is as follows: This is the same as the change in volume of each song when placed in RC2.
  • the volume adjustment section 65A adjusts the volume level of each frequency band of the first music and the second music as described above. From this, by operating each of the operators 33A1 and 33B1 as follows, the volume of each frequency band of the first song and the volume of each frequency band of the second song can be adjusted in the same way as when operating the fader operator 51. You can change the volume.
  • the volume of the entire first song is the first set volume V1st
  • the volume of the entire second song is the second minimum volume V2min.
  • the volume level of the high frequency band of the second music becomes the set level H2lv
  • the volume level of the middle frequency band of the second music becomes the set level M2lv.
  • the volume level of the high frequency band of the second song remains at the set level H2lv
  • the volume level of the middle frequency band of the second song remains the set level M2lv.
  • the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song increases from the minimum level L2min
  • the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song decreases from the preset level L1lv. Accordingly, the volume of the entire first song decreases from the first set volume V1st.
  • the second operator 33B1 reaches the second end TB2 since the first operator 33A1 is also arranged at the second end TA2, as shown in FIG.
  • the volume level of the first music piece and the volume level of the low frequency band of the first music piece are both equal to each other. After this, when only the first controller 33A1 is operated from the second end TA2 in the -DA direction, the volume level of the high frequency band of the first song remains at the set level H1lv, and the volume level of the middle frequency band of the first song remains the same. While the volume level remains at the set level M1lv, as shown in FIG. 14, the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song decreases, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song increases.
  • the volume level of the low frequency band of the first music becomes the minimum level L1min
  • the volume level of the low frequency band of the second music reaches the preset level L2lv.
  • the volume of the entire second music piece becomes the second set volume V2st. That is, the conditions for the volume of the entire second music to be the second preset volume V2st are that the second controller 33B1 is located at the second end TB2, and the first controller 33A1 is located at the position PA and the first It is arranged in range RA1 or first end TA1. Note that the conditions for the volume of the entire first music piece to be the first set volume V1st are also the same.
  • the volume level of the low frequency band of the first music is set to the minimum level L1min.
  • the volume level of the high frequency band and the medium frequency band of the first music piece decreases.
  • the first controller 33A1 reaches the first end TA1
  • the volume level of the high frequency band of the first song becomes the minimum level H1min
  • the volume level of the middle frequency band of the second song becomes the minimum level M1min
  • the first The volume of the entire music becomes the first minimum volume V1min.
  • the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the first music piece can be adjusted.
  • the volume level of the low frequency band of the first music piece is lowered.
  • the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song can be increased. That is, in a state where the volume levels of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the first song are set to preset levels H1lv and M1lv, and the volume levels of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the second song are set to preset levels H2lv and M2lv, By increasing or decreasing the volume levels of the low frequency bands of the first music piece and the second music piece, it is possible to replace the volume levels of the low frequency bands of the first music piece and the second music piece.
  • the operable range RC of the fader operator 51 includes a first range RC1, a second range RC2, and a third range RC3.
  • the first range RC1 is a range between the first position PC1 and the second position PC2.
  • the second position PC2 is located in the +DC direction with respect to the first position PC1.
  • the +DC direction corresponds to a first operation direction from the first end TC1 to the second end TC2.
  • the second range RC2 is a range between the second position PC2 and the third position PC3.
  • the third position PC3 is located in the +DC direction with respect to the second position PC2.
  • the third range RC3 is a range between the third position PC3 and the fourth position PC4.
  • the fourth position PC4 is located in the +DC direction with respect to the third position PC3.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 brings the BPM of the first music piece and the second music piece closer to the BPM of the second music piece.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM during playback of the first music piece and the BPM during playback of the second music piece as the first operator 33A1 is moved in the -DA direction or as the second operator 33B1 is moved in the +DB direction.
  • the time BPM is brought closer to the BPM of the second song. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the BPM of each song during playback so that it approaches the BPM of the second song. Therefore, the operation for bringing the BPM of each song closer to the BPM of the second song during reproduction can be simplified.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 does not change the BPM when playing the first song and the BPM when playing the second song.
  • the BPM is not changed when each music piece is played. This allows the first music and the second music to be easily mixed without any discomfort.
  • the volume adjustment section 65A is configured to control the high frequency band of the first song, the middle frequency band of the first song, and the second song.
  • the volume levels of the high frequency band and the medium frequency band of the second song are at the set levels H1lv, M1lv, H2lv, M2lv, as the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction, the volume level of the first song becomes lower. While decreasing the volume level of the frequency band, the volume level of the low frequency band of the second music piece is increased.
  • the set level H1lv is the volume level set by the user using the high frequency band adjustment section 322 of the first channel operation section 3A as the maximum level of the high frequency band of the first song.
  • the set levels M1lv, H2lv, and M2lv corresponds to the first operation direction.
  • the total volume of the low frequency components of each of the first music piece and the second music piece can be maintained at the same level as the total volume of each low frequency component before mixing.
  • each song is played at an intermediate BPM, the first song and the second song can be mixed without any discomfort.
  • the first position PC1 is the first end TC1
  • the fourth position PC4 is the second end TC2.
  • the first range RC1 is 1/3 of the operable range RC from the first end TC1.
  • the second range RC2 is 1/3 of the operable range RC from the second position PC2.
  • the third range RC3 is 1/3 of the operable range RC from the third position PC3. According to such a configuration, the user can intuitively grasp the respective positions of the first range RC1, the second range RC2, and the third range RC3. Therefore, it is possible to easily operate the fader operator 51 when mixing the first music and the second music.
  • the sound control device according to the present embodiment has the same configuration as the sound control devices according to the first and second embodiments, except that it further includes an operation determination section, a playback control section, a position setting section, and a position selection section. , is different from the sound control device according to the first and second embodiments.
  • parts that are the same or substantially the same as parts that have already been described are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.
  • FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control section 6B included in the acoustic control device according to this embodiment.
  • the sound control device according to the present embodiment includes a control section 6B shown in FIG. 15 instead of the control section 6 according to the first embodiment and the control section 6A according to the second embodiment. It has the same configuration and functions as the acoustic control device according to the second embodiment. That is, although not shown in the drawings, the audio control device according to the present embodiment includes a housing 2, two channel operation sections 3, a mode changeover switch 4, and a crossfader 5, as well as the control shown in FIG. A section 6B is provided.
  • the control unit 6B controls the audio control device according to the present embodiment, and includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) that reads and executes an audio control program stored in a storage unit (not shown). ) and other processors. That is, the processor is a computer.
  • the control unit 6B further includes an operation determination unit 67, a playback control unit 68, a position setting unit 69, and a position selection unit 70 in addition to the configuration included in the control unit 6A. Note that the operation determination section 67 and the reproduction control section 68 function when the operation mode of the acoustic control device is the assist mode.
  • the operation determination unit 67 determines the operation of the fader operator 51. Specifically, the operation determination unit 67 determines whether the speed of the fader operator 51 when reaching the other end from one of the first end TC1 and the second end TC2 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value. Determine whether or not. In other words, the operation determination unit 67 determines whether the time from one end to the other end of the first end TC1 and the second end TC2 is less than a predetermined time. Specifically, the operation determination unit 67 determines whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fader operator 51 located at one end of the first end TC1 and the second end TC2 was operated toward the other end. In the meantime, it is determined whether the other end has been reached.
  • the playback control unit 68 controls the playback state of the first music piece by the first playback unit 61 and the playback state of the second music piece by the second playback unit 62 in accordance with the operation of the fader operator 51. Specifically, the playback control unit 68 controls the respective playback positions of the first music piece and the second music piece based on the determination result by the operation determination unit 67.
  • the playback control unit 68 determines that the speed of the fader operator 51 when reaching the other end from one end of the first end TC1 and the second end TC2 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value. In this case, the following first regeneration control process is executed, and if the speed is determined to be less than a predetermined value, the following second regeneration control process is executed. In other words, the reproduction control unit 68 determines that the arrival time, which is the time taken to reach the other end from one end of the first end TC1 and the second end TC2, is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. If the arrival time is determined to be less than the predetermined time, the following first reproduction control process is executed, and if it is determined that the arrival time is less than the predetermined time, the following second reproduction control process is executed.
  • the playback control unit 68 controls the playback control unit 68 when the fader operator 51 that is away from one of the first end TC1 and the second end TC2 reaches the other end in less than a predetermined time. executes the following second regeneration control process, and if the other end has not been reached even after a predetermined time has elapsed, executes the following first regeneration control process. In any of the playback control processes, if the fader operator 51 is placed at the first end TC1 or the second end TC2, the playback control unit 68 controls the first music piece by the first playback unit 61. and the reproduction of the second music piece by the second reproduction section 62 are not controlled.
  • the first playback control process is a process performed when the fader operator 51 is slowly operated from one end of the first end TC1 and the second end TC2 to the other end.
  • the fader operator 51 is operated from the first end TC1 to the second end TC2.
  • the playback control unit 68 moves the playback position of the first song to a predetermined first playback position, and moves the playback position of the second song to a predetermined first playback position. to a predetermined third playback position. Note that if the second playback section 62 has stopped playing the second song, the playback control section 68 causes the second playback section 62 to start playing the second song.
  • the playback control unit 68 loops between the first playback position and a predetermined second playback position that is a playback position after the first playback position. Let it play. Further, when the playback position of the second song moves to the third playback position, the playback control unit 68 controls the playback position between the third playback position and a predetermined fourth playback position that is a playback position after the third playback position. play in a loop. That is, the playback position of the second music piece moved when the fader operator 51 is operated from the first end TC1 in the +DC direction is the third playback position, which is the playback position before the fourth playback position. .
  • the playback control section 68 cancels the loop playback of the first song by the first playback section 61, and causes the second playback section 62 to stop the loop playback of the second song. unlock. This makes it possible to replace the first song with the second song and to play the second song at the fourth playback position.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of the first reproduction control process by the reproduction control section 68. Note that in FIG. 16, "Breakdown” is written as “Break”. Next, a specific example of the first reproduction control process will be described with reference to FIG. 16.
  • the first song and the second song each include intro (Intro), breakdown 1 (Breakdown1), buildup 1 (Buildup1), drop 1 (Drop1), breakdown 2 (Breakdown2), It is a song in which the song components are connected in the order of Buildup 2, Drop 2, and Outro.
  • intro Intro
  • breakdown 1 Breakdown1
  • buildup 1 Buildup1
  • Drop1 drop 1
  • Breakdown2 breakdown 2
  • the outro start position is set as the first playback position of the first song
  • the outro end position that is, the end position of the first song
  • the second playback position of the first song is set as the second playback position of the first song.
  • a position in the middle of build-up 1 is set as the third playback position of the second song
  • a start position of drop 1 is set as the fourth playback position of the second song.
  • the playback control unit 68 changes the playback position PP1 of the first song to the outro start position. (first playback position), and also moves the playback position PP2 of the second music piece to a position in the middle of build-up 1 (third playback position).
  • the reproduction control unit 68 causes the second reproduction unit 62 to start playing the second music piece.
  • the playback control unit 68 controls the outro start position of the first song and the outro start position of the first song.
  • the first playback unit 61 is caused to repeatedly play back the music portion between the ending position (second playback position).
  • the playback control unit 68 controls the position in the middle of build-up 1 of the second song and the start position of drop 1 (fourth playback position ) is caused to be repeatedly played back by the second playback section 62.
  • the playback control unit 68 cancels the repeat playback of the first song and the repeat playback of the second song. do.
  • the playback of the first music piece by the first playback unit 61 ends when the playback of the outro of the first music piece ends, and the playback of the second music piece by the second playback unit 62 continues, and after a while.
  • Drop 1 of the second song is played.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 sets the volume of the entire first song to the first minimum volume V1min, and sets the volume of the entire second song to the first minimum volume V1min. The volume is set to the second set volume V2st.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM of each song at the time of reproduction to the BPM of the second song.
  • the fader operator 51 is operated from the first end TC1 to the second end TC2 has been described above. However, the same applies when the fader operator 51 is operated from the second end TC2 to the first end TC1. That is, when the fader operator 51 is operated from the second end TC2 in the -DC direction, the playback position PP2 is moved to the first playback position of the second song, and then the first playback position and the second playback position are moved. The music part between is played repeatedly, and after the playback position PP1 is moved to the third playback position of the first music, the music part between the third playback position and the fourth playback position is played repeatedly. .
  • the playback control section 68 cancels the repeat playback of each song.
  • the playback position of the first music piece and the playback position of the second music piece are controlled in accordance with the operation from the first end TC1 and the second end TC2 of the fader operator 51. Accordingly, it is possible to mix the first music piece and the second music piece naturally.
  • the playback control unit 68 described above controls the reproduction of the music part between the third playback position and the fourth playback position in the second music piece. I decided to cancel repeat playback. In other words, although repeat playback is canceled for the second music piece, playback continues from the playback position at the time when the fader operator 51 reaches the second end TC2.
  • the reproduction control unit 68 may implement one of the following first pattern and second pattern.
  • the playback position PP2 of the second music piece is moved to the fourth playback position at the timing when the fader operator 51 reaches the second end TC2.
  • the second pattern if the playback position PP2 of the second music piece at the timing when the fader operator 51 reaches the second end TC2 has not reached the bar break, the timing at which the playback of the current bar ends is determined. , the playback position PP2 is moved to the fourth playback position.
  • the playback position PP2 of the second song is moved to drop 1 at bar breaks, so each song can be mixed naturally so that sudden changes in composition do not occur.
  • the second playback control process is a process performed when the fader operator 51 is instantaneously operated from one end of the first end TC1 and the second end TC2 to the other end. Specifically, in the second playback control process, when the fader operator 51 is momentarily operated from the first end TC1 to the second end TC2, the second playback control process changes the playback position of the second song to the fourth end of the second song. When the player moves to the playback position and momentarily operates from the second end TC2 to the first end TC1, the playback position of the first music piece is moved to the fourth playback position of the first music piece.
  • the first minimum volume V1min is set as the volume of the entire first music piece by the volume adjustment unit 65, so the first music piece is not output.
  • the playback position of the first music piece is not changed;
  • the playback position of the second song is moved to the start position of drop 1. Note that if the second playback section 62 has stopped playing the second song, the playback control section 68 causes the second playback section 62 to start playing the second song.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM of each song during playback to the BPM of the second song.
  • the position setting unit 69 shown in FIG. 15 sets points that can be set at the first playback position, the second playback position, the third playback position, and the fourth playback position for each song according to the user's operation.
  • An example of such a point is a cue. Further, for example, the point may be the start position of each component included in the song.
  • the constituent elements are constituent elements such as an intro, a drop, and an outro.
  • the position selection unit 70 functions when the operation mode of the acoustic control device is the assist mode.
  • the position selection unit 70 selects a first playback position, a second playback position, a third playback position, and a fourth playback position of each song from the points set by the position setting unit 69 according to the user's operation.
  • Each playback position selected by the position selection unit 70 is used in the first playback control process and the second playback control process by the playback control unit 68 described above.
  • the position setting section 69 and the position selection section 70 allow the user to set and select each playback position at an arbitrary position.
  • the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and modifications and improvements within the range that can achieve the purpose of the present invention are included in the present invention.
  • the fader operator 51 of the crossfader 5 the first operator 33A1 of the first channel fader 33A, and the The second operator 33B1 of the two-channel fader 33B is listed.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the controls that adjust the volumes of the first music piece and the second music piece simultaneously or individually may not be slidable controls, for example, the controls that can be rotated around a rotation axis. It may be a knob. That is, the operator in the present invention may be another operator.
  • the sound control device includes an operator for adjusting the volume of each of the first song and the second song, and an operation for setting the BPM during playback of each of the first song and the second song.
  • the child may be provided separately.
  • the sound control device according to the present invention may separately include a fader operator that adjusts the volume of each song and a fader operator that sets the BPM when each song is played.
  • the acoustic control device of the present invention may include only the assist mode as the operation mode.
  • the sound control device of the present invention includes a plurality of operators, and when one of the plurality of operators is operated, the volume adjustment units 65, 65A and the BPM setting unit 66 are set to the normal mode. When other operators are operated, the volume adjustment sections 65, 65A and the BPM setting section 66 may function in an assist mode.
  • the BPM of the first song is the adjusted BPM when playing the first song when the BPM when playing the first song is adjusted by the first tempo slider 34A; If the BPM during playback of the first song is not adjusted, it is determined that the BPM is the BPM of the original song of the first song. Similarly, if the BPM of the second song is adjusted by the second tempo slider 34B, the BPM of the second song is the adjusted BPM of the second song. If the BPM is not adjusted during playback, it is assumed that the BPM is that of the original song of the second song.
  • the BPM of the first song is not limited to this, and may be the BPM of the original song of the first song even if the BPM during playback of the first song is adjusted by the first tempo slider 34A.
  • the BPM of the second song may be the BPM of the original song of the second song even if the BPM during reproduction of the second song is adjusted by the second tempo slider 34B.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM of each of the first music piece and the second music piece to the above intermediate value during reproduction.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the position of the fader operator 51 when the volume of the low frequency band of each song becomes the same does not necessarily have to be an intermediate position in the operable range RC.
  • the position of the fader operator 51 when the volume adjustment unit 65A makes the volume of the low frequency band of the first song the same as the volume of the low frequency band of the second song is not necessarily within the operable range. It does not have to be an intermediate position in RC.
  • the volume adjustment sections 65 and 65A set the volume of the first song to the minimum value and set the volume of the second song to the maximum value. did. Further, when the fader operator 51 is placed at the second end TC2, the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM when playing the first song and the BPM when playing the second song to the BPM of the second song. did.
  • the present invention is not limited thereto, and when the fader operator 51 is disposed at the second end TC2, it is sufficient that the ratio of the volume of the second music piece to the output volume is maximized. Further, when the volume of the first song is the minimum value, the BPM setting unit 66 does not need to set the BPM during reproduction of the first song to the BPM of the second song.
  • the operable range RC includes the first range RC1, the second range RC2, and the third range RC3.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM at the time of reproduction of the first music piece and the BPM at the time of reproduction of the second music piece according to the position of the fader operator 51. It is assumed that the setting range is from the BPM of the song to the intermediate value between the BPM of the first song and the BPM of the second song. In the second range RC2, the BPM setting unit 66 does not change the BPM when playing the first song and the BPM when playing the second song.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM when playing the first song and the BPM when playing the second song in a range from the above-mentioned intermediate value to the BPM of the second song.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 may change the BPM of each of the first music piece and the second music piece during reproduction also in the second range RC2.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 may change the BPM during playback of each of the first music piece and the second music piece at a rate of change different from that in the first range RC1 and the third range RC3.
  • a part of the first range RC1 and a part of the second range RC2 may overlap with each other
  • a part of the second range RC2 and a part of the third range RC3 may overlap with each other. .
  • the volume adjustment section 65A controls the high frequency band of the first song, the middle frequency band of the first song, and the low frequency band of the first song.
  • the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction in a state where the volume level of each band is the set level H1lv, M1lv, L1lv, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the second music is the minimum level L2min.
  • the volume level of each of the high frequency band and the medium frequency band of the second song is increased as the frequency increases.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 adjusts the volume levels of the high frequency band of each song and the medium frequency band of each song to the preset levels H1lv, M1lv, H2lv, M2lv.
  • the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song is decreased, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song is increased.
  • the volume adjustment section 65 adjusts the volume level of each of the high frequency band, medium frequency band, and low frequency band of the second music to the preset levels H2lv, M2lv, L2lv.
  • the high frequency band of the first song and the inside of the first song are The idea is to reduce the volume level of each frequency band.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the operable range RC may be divided into more ranges.
  • a range for increasing/decreasing the volume level of the high frequency band of the first song and a range for increasing/decreasing the volume level of the medium frequency band of the first song may be provided separately from each other.
  • the range for increasing/decreasing the volume level of the high frequency band of the second song and the range for increasing/decreasing the volume level of the medium frequency band of the second song may be provided separately from each other.
  • the first range RC1 is 1/3 of the operable range RC from the first end TC1
  • the second range RC2 is 1/3 of the operable range RC from the second position PC2.
  • the third range RC3 is 1/3 of the operable range RC from the third position PC3.
  • each of the ranges RC1 to RC3 is an equally divided range in the operable range RC.
  • the present invention is not limited thereto, and one of the first range RC1, second range RC2, and third range RC3 may be larger than the other ranges.
  • the high frequency band of the first song, the middle frequency band of the first song, the middle frequency band of the second song, the middle frequency band of the second song It is assumed that the respective volume levels of the high frequency band and the medium frequency band of the second song are maintained at the preset levels H1lv, M1lv, H2lv, and M2lv.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the volume level of each of the high frequency band of the first song, the medium frequency band of the first song, the high frequency band of the second song, and the medium frequency band of the second song may be set at a predetermined volume level. May be maintained.
  • the volume level of each of the high frequency band of the second song and the medium frequency band of the second song reaches the preset levels H2lv, M2lv.
  • the volume level of the low frequency band of the first music piece may start to increase, and the volume level of each of the high frequency band and the middle frequency band of the first music piece may decrease before the volume level of the low frequency band of the first music piece reaches the minimum level L1min. You can start. The same applies when the first operator 33A1 and the second operator 33B1 are operated.
  • the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM of the first music and the second music at the time of playback to the BPM of the first music.
  • the BPM of each of the first music piece and the second music piece is set as the BPM of the second music piece.
  • the position of the fader operator 51 when the BPM of each song becomes the BPM of the second song when the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction does not have to be the second end TC2.
  • the position may be in the -DC direction relative to the second end TC2.
  • the position of the fader operator 51 when the BPM of each song becomes the BPM of the first song does not have to be at the first end TC1. Often, the position may be in the +DC direction relative to the first end TC1. The same applies when the first operator 33A1 and the second operator 33B1 are operated at the first end TA1, TB1 and the second end TA2, TB2.
  • the volume of the entire second music piece is set to the second minimum volume V2min
  • the first end TC1 is set to the second minimum volume V2min
  • the volume of the entire song was set to the first minimum volume V1min.
  • the position of the fader operator 51 when the volume of the entire first song reaches the first minimum volume V1min when the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction may not be at the second end TC2. The position may be in the -DC direction relative to the second end TC2.
  • the position of the fader operator 51 when the volume of the entire second song reaches the second minimum volume V2min when the fader operator 51 is operated in the -DC direction does not have to be at the first end TC1. Often, the position may be in the +DC direction relative to the first end TC1. Furthermore, when the fader operator 51 reaches the first end TC1 in the operable range RC, the volume of the entire second music piece does not have to be set to the second minimum volume V2min, and when the fader operator 51 reaches the second end TC2. Furthermore, the volume of the entire first music piece may not be set to the first minimum volume V1min. The same applies when the first operator 33A1 and the second operator 33B1 are operated at the first end TA1, TB1 and the second end TA2, TB2.
  • the fader operator 51 when the fader operator 51 is further operated in the +DC direction from the third position PC3 where the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song reaches the minimum level L1min, the high frequency band and medium frequency of the first song I decided to lower the volume level of each band.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and as described above, when the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction from a position in the -DC direction relative to the third position PC3, not only the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song but also , the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the first music may be reduced. The same applies to the volume level of each frequency band of the second music, and the same applies when the first operator 33A1 and the second operator 33B1 are operated.
  • the sound control program read and executed by the arithmetic processing circuit that is a computer is stored in a storage unit (not shown).
  • the present invention is not limited thereto, and the sound control program may be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium, and may be read from the recording medium and executed when the sound control device 1 is operated.
  • the acoustic control program may be provided from a providing device such as a server via a network such as the Internet.
  • a sound control device that mixes the first music and the second music, a volume adjustment unit that adjusts the balance between the volume of the first song and the volume of the second song according to the position of an operator operated by the user;
  • a BPM setting section is provided that sets a BPM when the first music piece is played and a BPM when the second music piece is played back, depending on the position of the operator.
  • the volume adjustment section lowers the volume of the first music piece as the operator is operated in a direction from a first end to a second end in an operable range of the operator, and decreases the volume of the first music piece. increase the volume of The BPM setting section sets the BPM at the time of reproduction of the first music and the BPM at the time of reproduction of the second music as the operator is operated in a direction from the first end toward the second end. The BPM of the first song is brought closer to the BPM of the second song.
  • the volume of the first song can be decreased and the volume of the second song can be increased, and the BPM of the first song and the BPM of the second song can be brought closer to the BPM of the second song whose volume increases. . Therefore, the first music piece and the second music piece can be easily mixed without any discomfort.
  • the volume adjustment section sets the volume of the first song to a minimum value and the volume of the second song to a maximum value when the operator is placed at the second end
  • the BPM setting unit sets the BPM when playing the first song and the BPM when playing the second song to the BPM of the second song.
  • the BPM of the second music piece can be set to the BPM when the second music piece is played back at which the volume becomes the maximum value. Therefore, when replacing the first song with the second song, the second song can be played back at the BPM of the second song.
  • the BPM setting unit sets each of the playback BPM of the first music piece and the playback BPM of the second music piece to the first music piece.
  • the BPM of the music is set to an intermediate value between the BPM of the music and the BPM of the second music. According to such a configuration, it is possible for the user to easily grasp the position where the BPM at the time of reproduction of the first music and the BPM at the time of reproduction of the second music have the above-mentioned intermediate value in the operable range of the operator. Therefore, the operator can be easily operated when adjusting the BPM during playback.
  • the operable range is a first range between a first position and a second position located in the first operating direction with respect to the first position; a second range between the second position and a third position located in the first operating direction with respect to the second position; a third range between the third position and a fourth position located in the first operating direction with respect to the third position;
  • the BPM setting unit brings the BPM of the first music piece and the second music piece closer to the BPM of the second music piece as the operator is moved in the first operation direction. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the BPM of each song during playback so that it approaches the BPM of the second song. Therefore, the operation for bringing the BPM of each song closer to the BPM of the second song during reproduction can be simplified.
  • the BPM setting unit does not change the BPM at the time of reproduction of the first music and the BPM at the time of reproduction of the second music, when the operator is arranged in the second range. According to such a configuration, when the controls are arranged in the second range where each of the first music piece and the second music piece can be easily heard, the BPM of the first music piece and the second music piece can be easily heard by not changing the BPM. To easily mix one song and a second song without feeling any discomfort.
  • the volume adjustment section includes a high frequency band of the first music, a medium frequency band of the first music, a high frequency band of the second music, and a high frequency band of the second music. While the volume level of each of the medium frequency bands is at the maximum level, as the operator is operated in the first operation direction, the volume level of the low frequency band of the first music piece is decreased, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the first music is decreased, 2 Increase the volume level of the low frequency band of the song.
  • the total volume of the low frequency components of each of the first music piece and the second music piece can be maintained at the same level as the total volume of each low frequency component before mixing.
  • the first position is the first end; the fourth position is the second end;
  • the first range is 1/3 of the operable range from the first end,
  • the second range is 1/3 of the operable range from the second position,
  • the third range is one third of the operable range from the third position. According to such a configuration, the user can intuitively grasp the respective positions of the first range, the second range, and the third range. Therefore, it is possible to easily operate the operator when mixing the first music and the second music.
  • the operator is a crossfader having a slideable fader operator. According to such a configuration, by operating the operator, the first music piece and the second music piece can be mixed without any discomfort. Therefore, the mixing operation between the first and second songs is easier than when operating the operator that adjusts the BPM when playing the first song and the operator that adjusts the BPM when playing the second song. can be implemented.
  • the sound control program is recorded in a computer-readable manner and causes the computer to function as the sound control device according to any one of [1] to [9].

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Acoustics & Sound (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Circuit For Audible Band Transducer (AREA)

Abstract

A sound control device (1) that mixes a first piece of music and a second piece of music comprises a volume adjustment unit (65, 65A) that adjusts the balance between the volume of the first piece and the volume of the second piece in accordance with the position of an operating element (51, 33A1, 33B1) operated by a user and a BPM setting unit (66) for setting the BPM for playback of the first piece and the BPM for playback of the second piece in accordance with the position of the operating element.

Description

音響制御装置及び音響制御プログラムSound control device and sound control program
 本発明は、音響制御装置及び音響制御プログラムに関する。 The present invention relates to a sound control device and a sound control program.
 従来、複数の楽曲をミックスして出力する音響装置が知られている(例えば特許文献1参照)。
 特許文献1に記載の音響装置は、いわゆるミキサーであり、PC及びスマートフォン等の楽曲供給装置から供給される楽曲をミックスし、ミックスした楽曲に応じた音声信号をスピーカーに出力する。
 音響装置は、第1チャンネルフェーダー、第2チャンネルフェーダー及びクロスフェーダー等の操作子を備える。第1チャンネルフェーダー及び第2チャンネルフェーダーのそれぞれは、上下に移動可能な操作子を有し、クロスフェーダーは、左右に移動可能な操作子を有する。音響装置は、第1チャンネルフェーダーが操作されると、楽曲供給装置から第1チャンネルに入力された楽曲の音量を調節し、第2チャンネルフェーダーが操作されると、楽曲供給装置から第2チャンネルに入力された楽曲の音量を調節する。また、音響装置は、クロスフェーダーが操作されると、第1チャンネルの音量と第2チャンネルの音量とのバランスを調節する。例えば、クロスフェーダーの操作子が左方に移動されるに従って、音響装置から出力される音量における第1チャンネルの割合が大きくなり、操作子が右方に移動されるに従って、音響装置から出力される音量における第2チャンネルの割合が大きくなる。
Conventionally, an audio device that mixes and outputs a plurality of songs is known (for example, see Patent Document 1).
The audio device described in Patent Document 1 is a so-called mixer, which mixes music supplied from a music supply device such as a PC and a smartphone, and outputs an audio signal corresponding to the mixed music to a speaker.
The audio device includes operators such as a first channel fader, a second channel fader, and a cross fader. Each of the first channel fader and the second channel fader has an operator that can move up and down, and the cross fader has an operator that can move left and right. When the first channel fader is operated, the audio device adjusts the volume of the music input from the music supply device to the first channel, and when the second channel fader is operated, the sound volume is adjusted from the music supply device to the second channel. Adjust the volume of the input song. Furthermore, when the crossfader is operated, the audio device adjusts the balance between the volume of the first channel and the volume of the second channel. For example, as the crossfader control is moved to the left, the proportion of the first channel in the volume output from the audio device increases, and as the control is moved to the right, the proportion of the volume output from the audio device increases. The proportion of the second channel in the volume increases.
国際公開第2022/054263号International Publication No. 2022/054263
 しかしながら、第1チャンネルに入力された楽曲と、第2チャンネルに入力された楽曲とをミックスする場合、初心者等の不慣れなユーザーが音響装置を操作すると、第1チャンネルの楽曲と第2チャンネルの楽曲とを違和感なくミックスすることが難しいという問題がある。 However, when mixing music input into the first channel and music input into the second channel, if an inexperienced user such as a beginner operates the audio device, the music on the first channel and the music on the second channel may be mixed. There is a problem in that it is difficult to mix the two without causing any discomfort.
 本発明の第1態様に係る音響制御装置は、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とをミキシングする音響制御装置において、ユーザーによって操作される操作子の位置に応じて、前記第1楽曲の音量と前記第2楽曲の音量とのバランスを調節する音量調節部と、前記操作子の位置に応じて、前記第1楽曲の再生時BPMと前記第2楽曲の再生時BPMとを設定するBPM設定部と、を備える。 A sound control device according to a first aspect of the present invention is a sound control device for mixing a first music piece and a second music piece, in which the volume of the first music piece and the sound volume of the first music piece are adjusted according to the position of an operator operated by a user. a volume adjustment section that adjusts the balance with the volume of the second song; and a BPM setting section that sets the BPM when playing the first song and the BPM when playing the second song according to the position of the operator. , is provided.
 本発明の第2態様に係る音響制御プログラムは、コンピューター読取可能に記録され、コンピューターを上記第1態様に係る音響制御装置として機能させる。 The sound control program according to the second aspect of the present invention is recorded in a computer-readable manner, and causes the computer to function as the sound control device according to the first aspect.
第1実施形態における音響制御装置の構成を示す模式図。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of an acoustic control device in a first embodiment. 第1実施形態における高周波帯域調節部、中周波帯域調節部及び低周波帯域調節部を示す模式図。FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a high frequency band adjustment section, a medium frequency band adjustment section, and a low frequency band adjustment section in the first embodiment. 第1実施形態における制御部を示すブロック図。FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a control unit in the first embodiment. 第1実施形態におけるクロスフェーダーを操作した場合の第1楽曲全体の音量の変化と第2楽曲全体の音量の変化とを示す図。FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the volume of the entire first song and changes in the volume of the entire second song when the crossfader is operated in the first embodiment. 第1実施形態におけるクロスフェーダーを操作した場合の第1楽曲の各周波数帯域の音量レベルの変化と第2楽曲の各周波数帯域の音量レベルの変化とを示す図。FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the volume level of each frequency band of the first song and changes in the volume level of each frequency band of the second song when the crossfader is operated in the first embodiment. 第1実施形態におけるアシストモードでの第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMの変化の一例を示す図。The figure which shows an example of the change of BPM at the time of each reproduction|regeneration of the 1st music and the 2nd music in assist mode in 1st Embodiment. 第1実施形態における第1チャンネルフェーダーを操作した場合の第1楽曲全体の音量の変化、及び、第2チャンネルフェーダーを操作した場合の第2楽曲全体の音量の変化を示す図。FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating changes in the volume of the entire first song when operating the first channel fader and changes in the volume of the entire second song when operating the second channel fader in the first embodiment. 第1実施形態におけるアシストモードでの第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMの変化の一例を示す図。The figure which shows an example of the change of BPM at the time of each reproduction|regeneration of the 1st music and the 2nd music in assist mode in 1st Embodiment. 第2実施形態における音響制御装置が備える制御部を示すブロック図。The block diagram which shows the control part with which the acoustic control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment is equipped. 第2実施形態におけるアシストモードでクロスフェーダーを操作した場合の第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの各周波数帯域の音量レベルの変化を示す図。FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the volume level of each frequency band of the first song and the second song when the crossfader is operated in the assist mode in the second embodiment. 第2実施形態における第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量の設定済レベルが0.6である場合の第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの各周波数帯域の音量レベルの変化を示す図。The figure which shows the change of the volume level of each frequency band of each of a 1st music and a 2nd music when the set level of the volume of the low frequency band of a 1st music in 2nd embodiment is 0.6. 第2実施形態におけるアシストモードでクロスフェーダーを操作したときの第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMの変化の他の一例を示す図。The figure which shows another example of the change of BPM at the time of each reproduction|regeneration of a 1st music and a 2nd music when a crossfader is operated in assist mode in 2nd Embodiment. 第2実施形態におけるアシストモードで第1チャンネルフェーダーを操作した場合の第1楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルの変化、並びに、第2チャンネルフェーダーを操作した場合の第2楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルの変化を示す図。Changes in the volume levels of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the first song when the first channel fader is operated in the assist mode in the second embodiment, and changes in the volume level of the second song when the second channel fader is operated. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing changes in volume levels in high frequency bands and medium frequency bands. 第2実施形態におけるアシストモードで第1チャンネルフェーダー及び第2チャンネルフェーダーを操作した場合の第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの低周波帯域の音量レベルの変化の一例を示す図。FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of changes in the volume levels of the low frequency bands of the first music piece and the second music piece when the first channel fader and the second channel fader are operated in the assist mode in the second embodiment. 第3実施形態における音響制御装置が備える制御部を示すブロック図。FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a control unit included in the acoustic control device according to the third embodiment. 第3実施形態における第1再生制御処理の一例を説明する図。FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of first reproduction control processing in the third embodiment.
 [第1実施形態]
 以下、本発明の第1実施形態について、図面に基づいて説明する。
 [音響制御装置の構成]
 図1は、本実施形態に係る音響制御装置1の構成を示す模式図である。
 本実施形態に係る音響制御装置1は、複数の楽曲をミキシングする。具体的に、音響制御装置1は、第1チャンネルにロードされた第1楽曲と、第2チャンネルにロードされた第2楽曲とをミキシングし、ミキシングした楽曲に応じた音声信号を出力する。
 詳しくは後述するが、音響制御装置1は、複数の操作子に応じて第1楽曲及び第2楽曲をミキシングするノーマルモードと、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のミキシングをアシストするアシストモードと、を備える点を特徴の1つとして有する。
 音響制御装置1は、図1に示すように、筐体2と、2つのチャンネル操作部3と、モード切替スイッチ4と、クロスフェーダー5と、を備える。図1では図示を省略するが、音響制御装置1は、音響制御装置1の動作を制御する制御部6(図3参照)を更に備える。
[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the drawings.
[Configuration of sound control device]
FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of an acoustic control device 1 according to the present embodiment.
The sound control device 1 according to this embodiment mixes a plurality of songs. Specifically, the audio control device 1 mixes the first music loaded onto the first channel and the second music loaded onto the second channel, and outputs an audio signal corresponding to the mixed music.
As will be described in detail later, the sound control device 1 operates in a normal mode in which the first music piece and the second music piece are mixed according to a plurality of operators, and an assist mode in which the mixing of the first music piece and the second music piece is assisted. One of its features is that
As shown in FIG. 1, the audio control device 1 includes a housing 2, two channel operation sections 3, a mode changeover switch 4, and a crossfader 5. Although not shown in FIG. 1, the sound control device 1 further includes a control section 6 (see FIG. 3) that controls the operation of the sound control device 1.
 [筐体の構成]
 筐体2は、略直方体形状に形成され、制御部6を内部に収容する。筐体2は、天面21、上面22、下面23、左側面24、右側面25、及び、図示しない底面を有する。
 天面21には、2つのチャンネル操作部3と、モード切替スイッチ4と、クロスフェーダー5と、が配置される。
[Case configuration]
The housing 2 is formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and accommodates the control unit 6 therein. The housing 2 has a top surface 21, a top surface 22, a bottom surface 23, a left side surface 24, a right side surface 25, and a bottom surface (not shown).
Two channel operation sections 3, a mode changeover switch 4, and a cross fader 5 are arranged on the top surface 21.
 [チャンネル操作部の構成]
 2つのチャンネル操作部3は、対応するチャンネルにロードされた楽曲の再生状態を操作する。2つのチャンネル操作部3は、第1チャンネルにロードされた第1楽曲の再生状態を操作する第1チャンネル操作部3A、及び、第2チャンネルにロードされた第2楽曲の再生状態を操作する第2チャンネル操作部3Bである。
 各チャンネル操作部3A,3Bは、ジョグダイヤル31、イコライザー調節部32、チャンネルフェーダー33及びテンポスライダー34を有する。
[Configuration of channel operation section]
The two channel operation units 3 operate the playback state of music loaded into the corresponding channels. The two channel operation units 3 include a first channel operation unit 3A that operates the playback state of the first song loaded on the first channel, and a first channel operation unit 3A that operates the playback status of the second song loaded on the second channel. This is a 2-channel operation section 3B.
Each channel operation section 3A, 3B has a jog dial 31, an equalizer adjustment section 32, a channel fader 33, and a tempo slider 34.
 ジョグダイヤル31は、回転可能に天面21に設けられ、再生中の楽曲の再生方向及び再生速度を調節する際に用いられるダイヤルである。なお、ユーザーがジョグダイヤル31の回転方向の変更と回転速度の変更とを組み合わせることにより、DJパフォーマンス特有のスクラッチ操作が行われる。 The jog dial 31 is rotatably provided on the top surface 21 and is used to adjust the playback direction and playback speed of the music being played. Note that a scratch operation unique to DJ performance is performed by the user combining a change in the rotation direction and a change in rotation speed of the jog dial 31.
 イコライザー調節部32は、対応するチャンネルのイコライザー調節処理を行う。具体的に、第1チャンネル操作部3Aのイコライザー調節部32は、第1チャンネルのイコライザー調節処理を行い、第2チャンネル操作部3Bのイコライザー調節部32は、第2チャンネルのイコライザー調節処理を行う。各イコライザー調節部32は、レベル調節部321、高周波帯域調節部322、中周波帯域調節部323、低周波帯域調節部324及びエフェクト調節部325を有する。
 レベル調節部321、高周波帯域調節部322、中周波帯域調節部323、低周波帯域調節部324及びエフェクト調節部325は、回転軸を中心に一方及び他方に回転可能なノブを有するロータリーエンコーダーである。
The equalizer adjustment section 32 performs equalizer adjustment processing for the corresponding channel. Specifically, the equalizer adjustment section 32 of the first channel operation section 3A performs equalizer adjustment processing for the first channel, and the equalizer adjustment section 32 of the second channel operation section 3B performs equalizer adjustment processing for the second channel. Each equalizer adjustment section 32 includes a level adjustment section 321 , a high frequency band adjustment section 322 , a medium frequency band adjustment section 323 , a low frequency band adjustment section 324 , and an effect adjustment section 325 .
The level adjustment section 321, the high frequency band adjustment section 322, the medium frequency band adjustment section 323, the low frequency band adjustment section 324, and the effect adjustment section 325 are rotary encoders having knobs that can be rotated in one direction and the other around the rotation axis. .
 レベル調節部321は、入力される楽曲の入力レベルを調節する。
 エフェクト調節部325は、対応するチャンネル操作部3に設定されたエフェクトのエフェクト量を調節する操作子である。
The level adjustment section 321 adjusts the input level of the input music.
The effect adjustment section 325 is an operator that adjusts the effect amount of the effect set in the corresponding channel operation section 3.
 図2は、高周波帯域調節部322、中周波帯域調節部323及び低周波帯域調節部324を示す模式図である。なお、図2では、高周波帯域調節部322、中周波帯域調節部323及び低周波帯域調節部324のそれぞれは「0.5」を指す位置に配置されている。
 高周波帯域調節部322は、入力される楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルを調節する。高周波帯域は、例えば4649Hz以上の周波数帯域である。
 高周波帯域調節部322は、図2に示すように、0以上、1以下の範囲で音量レベルを調節する。高周波帯域調節部322によって設定された音量レベルを設定済レベルとすると、高周波帯域調節部322を反時計回りの限界位置まで回転させた場合には、高周波帯域の設定済レベルは0となり、時計回りの限界位置まで回転させた場合には、高周波帯域の設定済レベルは1となる。すなわち、高周波帯域調節部322が「0」を指す位置に配置されると、高周波帯域の設定済レベルは0となり、高周波帯域調節部322が「1」を指す位置に配置されると、高周波帯域の設定済レベルは1となる。また、高周波帯域調節部322が「0.5」を指す位置に配置されると  、高周波帯域の設定済レベルは0.5となる。
FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the high frequency band adjustment section 322, the medium frequency band adjustment section 323, and the low frequency band adjustment section 324. In addition, in FIG. 2, each of the high frequency band adjustment section 322, the medium frequency band adjustment section 323, and the low frequency band adjustment section 324 is arranged at a position indicating "0.5".
The high frequency band adjustment section 322 adjusts the volume level of the high frequency band of the input music. The high frequency band is, for example, a frequency band of 4649 Hz or higher.
The high frequency band adjustment section 322 adjusts the volume level in a range of 0 or more and 1 or less, as shown in FIG. If the volume level set by the high frequency band adjustment section 322 is the set level, when the high frequency band adjustment section 322 is rotated to the counterclockwise limit position, the set level of the high frequency band becomes 0, and the set level of the high frequency band becomes 0. When rotated to the limit position, the set level of the high frequency band becomes 1. That is, when the high frequency band adjustment section 322 is placed at a position pointing to "0", the set level of the high frequency band becomes 0, and when the high frequency band adjustment section 322 is placed at a position pointing to "1", the high frequency band The set level of is 1. Further, when the high frequency band adjustment section 322 is placed at a position pointing to "0.5", the set level of the high frequency band becomes 0.5.
 以下、第1チャンネル操作部3Aの高周波帯域調節部322によって設定された第1楽曲の高周波帯域の設定済レベルを設定済レベルH1lvとする。第2チャンネル操作部3Bの高周波帯域調節部322によって設定された第2楽曲の高周波帯域の設定済レベルを設定済レベルH2lvとする。設定済レベルH1lvは、第1楽曲の高周波帯域の最大レベルとして、第1チャンネル操作部3Aの高周波帯域調節部322を用いてユーザーによって設定された音量レベルである。設定済レベルH2lvは、第2楽曲の高周波帯域の最大レベルとして、第2チャンネル操作部3Bの高周波帯域調節部322を用いてユーザーによって設定された音量レベルである。
 また、第1楽曲の高周波帯域の最小音量レベルを最小レベルH1minとし、第2楽曲の高周波帯域の最小音量レベルを最小レベルH2minとする。最小レベルH1minは、設定済レベルH1lvよりも小さい値であり、最小レベルH2minは、設定済レベルH2lvよりも小さい値である。以下の説明では、最小レベルH1min,H2minを便宜上0とする。
Hereinafter, the set level of the high frequency band of the first music piece set by the high frequency band adjustment section 322 of the first channel operation section 3A will be referred to as the set level H1lv. The set level of the high frequency band of the second music piece set by the high frequency band adjustment unit 322 of the second channel operation unit 3B is set as the set level H2lv. The set level H1lv is the volume level set by the user using the high frequency band adjustment section 322 of the first channel operation section 3A as the maximum level of the high frequency band of the first song. The set level H2lv is the volume level set by the user using the high frequency band adjustment section 322 of the second channel operation section 3B as the maximum level of the high frequency band of the second music.
Further, the minimum volume level of the high frequency band of the first music piece is set as the minimum level H1min, and the minimum volume level of the high frequency band of the second music piece is set as the minimum level H2min. The minimum level H1min is a value smaller than the set level H1lv, and the minimum level H2min is a value smaller than the set level H2lv. In the following description, the minimum levels H1min and H2min are assumed to be 0 for convenience.
 中周波帯域調節部323は、入力される楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルを調節する。中周波帯域は、例えば284Hzを超え、4649Hz未満の周波数帯域である。
 中周波帯域調節部323は、図2に示すように、0以上、1以下の範囲で音量レベルを調節する。中周波帯域調節部323による音量レベルの設定は、高周波帯域調節部322による音量レベルの設定と同様である。
 以下、中周波帯域調節部323によって設定された音量レベルを設定済レベルとする。詳述すると、第1チャンネル操作部3Aの中周波帯域調節部323によって設定された第1楽曲の中周波帯域の設定済レベルを設定済レベルM1lvという。第2チャンネル操作部3Bの中周波帯域調節部323によって設定された第2楽曲の中周波帯域の設定済レベルを設定済レベルM2lvという。設定済レベルM1lvは、第1楽曲の中周波帯域の最大レベルとして、第1チャンネル操作部3Aの中周波帯域調節部323を用いてユーザーによって設定された音量レベルである。設定済レベルM2lvは、第2楽曲の中周波帯域の最大レベルとして、第2チャンネル操作部3Bの中周波帯域調節部323を用いてユーザーによって設定された音量レベルである。
 また、第1楽曲の中周波帯域の最小音量レベルを最小レベルM1minとし、第2楽曲の中周波帯域の最小音量レベルを最小レベルM2minとする。最小レベルM1minは、設定済レベルM1lvよりも小さい値であり、最小レベルM2minは、設定済レベルM2lvよりも小さい値である。以下の説明では、最小レベルM1min,M2minを便宜上0とする。
The medium frequency band adjustment section 323 adjusts the volume level of the medium frequency band of the input music. The medium frequency band is, for example, a frequency band exceeding 284 Hz and below 4649 Hz.
As shown in FIG. 2, the medium frequency band adjustment section 323 adjusts the volume level in a range of 0 or more and 1 or less. The setting of the volume level by the medium frequency band adjustment section 323 is similar to the setting of the volume level by the high frequency band adjustment section 322.
Hereinafter, the volume level set by the medium frequency band adjustment section 323 will be referred to as the set level. To explain in detail, the set level of the middle frequency band of the first song set by the middle frequency band adjustment section 323 of the first channel operation section 3A is referred to as the set level M1lv. The set level of the middle frequency band of the second song set by the middle frequency band adjustment unit 323 of the second channel operation unit 3B is referred to as the set level M2lv. The set level M1lv is the volume level set by the user as the maximum level of the intermediate frequency band of the first song using the intermediate frequency band adjustment section 323 of the first channel operation section 3A. The set level M2lv is the volume level set by the user as the maximum level of the intermediate frequency band of the second music piece using the intermediate frequency band adjustment section 323 of the second channel operation section 3B.
Further, the minimum volume level of the intermediate frequency band of the first song is set to the minimum level M1min, and the minimum volume level of the intermediate frequency band of the second song is set to the minimum level M2min. The minimum level M1min is a value smaller than the set level M1lv, and the minimum level M2min is a value smaller than the set level M2lv. In the following description, the minimum levels M1min and M2min are set to 0 for convenience.
 低周波帯域調節部324は、入力される楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを調整する。低周波帯域は、例えば284Hz以下の周波数帯域である。
 低周波帯域調節部324は、図2に示すように、0以上、1以下の範囲で音量レベルを調節する。低周波帯域調節部324による音量レベルの設定は、高周波帯域調節部322による音量レベルの設定と同様である。
 以下、低周波帯域調節部324によって設定された音量レベルを設定済レベルとする。詳述すると、第1チャンネル操作部3Aの低周波帯域調節部324によって設定された第1楽曲の低周波帯域の設定済レベルを設定済レベルL1lvという。第2チャンネル操作部3Bの低周波帯域調節部324によって設定された第2楽曲の低周波帯域の設定済レベルを設定済レベルL2lvという。設定済レベルL1lvは、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の最大レベルとして、第1チャンネル操作部3Aの低周波帯域調節部324を用いてユーザーによって設定された音量レベルである。設定済レベルL2lvは、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の最大レベルとして、第2チャンネル操作部3Bの低周波帯域調節部324を用いてユーザーによって設定された音量レベルである。
 また、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の最小音量レベルを最小レベルL1minとし、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の最小音量レベルを最小レベルL2minとする。最小レベルL1minは、設定済レベルL1lvよりも小さい値であり、最小レベルL2minは、設定済レベルL2lvよりも小さい値である。以下の説明では、最小レベルL1min,L2minを便宜上0とする。
The low frequency band adjustment section 324 adjusts the volume level of the low frequency band of the input music. The low frequency band is, for example, a frequency band of 284 Hz or less.
As shown in FIG. 2, the low frequency band adjustment section 324 adjusts the volume level in a range of 0 or more and 1 or less. The setting of the volume level by the low frequency band adjustment section 324 is similar to the setting of the volume level by the high frequency band adjustment section 322.
Hereinafter, the volume level set by the low frequency band adjustment section 324 will be referred to as the set level. More specifically, the set level of the low frequency band of the first music piece set by the low frequency band adjustment section 324 of the first channel operation section 3A is referred to as the set level L1lv. The set level of the low frequency band of the second music piece set by the low frequency band adjustment unit 324 of the second channel operation unit 3B is referred to as the set level L2lv. The set level L1lv is the volume level set by the user using the low frequency band adjustment section 324 of the first channel operation section 3A as the maximum level of the low frequency band of the first song. The set level L2lv is the volume level set by the user using the low frequency band adjustment section 324 of the second channel operation section 3B as the maximum level of the low frequency band of the second music piece.
Further, the minimum volume level of the low frequency band of the first music piece is set as the minimum level L1min, and the minimum volume level of the low frequency band of the second music piece is set as the minimum level L2min. The minimum level L1min is a value smaller than the set level L1lv, and the minimum level L2min is a value smaller than the set level L2lv. In the following description, the minimum levels L1min and L2min are assumed to be 0 for convenience.
 図1に示すチャンネルフェーダー33は、対応するチャンネル操作部3から出力される音量を調整する操作子である。具体的に、第1チャンネル操作部3Aのチャンネルフェーダー33は、第1チャンネルフェーダー33Aであり、第1チャンネル操作部3Aから出力される音量を調整する。第2チャンネル操作部3Bのチャンネルフェーダー33は、第2チャンネルフェーダー33Bであり、第2チャンネル操作部3Bから出力される音量を調整する。
 各チャンネルフェーダー33は、上下にスライド可能なフェーダー操作子331を有する。フェーダー操作子331が上方向に操作されると、後述する音量調節部65が、対応するチャンネル操作部3から出力される楽曲全体の音量を増加させる。フェーダー操作子331が下方向に操作されると、音量調節部65が、対応するチャンネル操作部3から出力される楽曲全体の音量を低下させる。
The channel fader 33 shown in FIG. 1 is an operator that adjusts the volume output from the corresponding channel operation section 3. Specifically, the channel fader 33 of the first channel operation section 3A is a first channel fader 33A, and adjusts the volume output from the first channel operation section 3A. The channel fader 33 of the second channel operation section 3B is a second channel fader 33B, and adjusts the volume output from the second channel operation section 3B.
Each channel fader 33 has a fader operator 331 that can be slid up and down. When the fader operator 331 is operated upward, a volume adjustment section 65, which will be described later, increases the volume of the entire song output from the corresponding channel operation section 3. When the fader operator 331 is operated downward, the volume adjustment section 65 lowers the volume of the entire song output from the corresponding channel operation section 3.
 以下の説明では、第1チャンネルフェーダー33Aのフェーダー操作子331を第1操作子33A1とし、第2チャンネルフェーダー33Bのフェーダー操作子331を第2操作子33B1とする。第1操作子33A1は、第1チャンネルにロードされた第1楽曲全体の音量を調節し、第2操作子33B1は、第2チャンネルにロードされた第2楽曲全体の音量を調節する。
 また、第1楽曲全体の最大音量は、第1操作子33A1によって設定された第1設定済音量であり、第2楽曲全体の最大音量は、第2操作子33B1によって設定された第2設定済音量である。
 なお、フェーダー操作子331の位置に応じて楽曲全体の音量を変化させるとは、高周波帯域の設定済レベルに応じた強度の高周波帯域の信号と、中周波帯域の設定済レベルに応じた強度の中周波帯域の信号と、低周波帯域の設定済レベルに応じた強度の低周波帯域の信号とのそれぞれを、フェーダー操作子331の位置に応じた増幅率で増幅することによって、各周波数帯域の音量を増減させることである。
In the following description, the fader operator 331 of the first channel fader 33A will be referred to as a first operator 33A1, and the fader operator 331 of the second channel fader 33B will be referred to as a second operator 33B1. The first operator 33A1 adjusts the volume of the entire first music piece loaded onto the first channel, and the second operator 33B1 adjusts the volume of the entire second music piece loaded onto the second channel.
Further, the maximum volume of the entire first music piece is the first set volume set by the first controller 33A1, and the maximum volume of the entire second music piece is the second set volume set by the second controller 33B1. It's the volume.
Note that changing the volume of the entire song according to the position of the fader operator 331 means that the signal in the high frequency band has an intensity that corresponds to the preset level of the high frequency band, and the signal has an intensity that corresponds to the preset level of the medium frequency band. By amplifying each of the medium frequency band signal and the low frequency band signal with an intensity corresponding to the preset level of the low frequency band with an amplification factor corresponding to the position of the fader operator 331, each frequency band is It means increasing or decreasing the volume.
 図1に示すテンポスライダー34は、対応するチャンネルにロードされた楽曲の再生時BPM(Beats Per Minute)を調節することによって、楽曲の再生速度を調節する操作子である。なお、楽曲のBPMとは、楽曲のテンポ、すなわち、楽曲の1分間の拍数を表している。そして、楽曲の原曲BPMとは、楽曲の原曲のテンポ、すなわち、原曲の1分間の拍数を表しており、再生時BPMとは、楽曲再生時のテンポ、すなわち、楽曲再生時の1分間の拍数を表している。
 第1チャンネル操作部3Aのテンポスライダー34は、第1テンポスライダー34Aであり、第1チャンネルにロードされた第1楽曲の再生時BPMを調節する。第2チャンネル操作部3Bのテンポスライダー34は、第2テンポスライダー34Bであり、第2チャンネルにロードされた第2楽曲の再生時BPMを調節する。
The tempo slider 34 shown in FIG. 1 is an operator that adjusts the playback speed of music by adjusting the BPM (Beats Per Minute) during playback of the music loaded on the corresponding channel. Note that the BPM of a song represents the tempo of the song, that is, the number of beats per minute of the song. The original BPM of a song refers to the tempo of the original song, that is, the number of beats per minute of the original song, and the playback BPM refers to the tempo at the time of song playback, that is, the number of beats per minute of the original song. It represents the number of beats per minute.
The tempo slider 34 of the first channel operation section 3A is a first tempo slider 34A, and adjusts the BPM during playback of the first music loaded on the first channel. The tempo slider 34 of the second channel operation section 3B is a second tempo slider 34B, and adjusts the BPM during reproduction of the second music loaded on the second channel.
 [モード切替スイッチの構成]
 図1に示すモード切替スイッチ4は、音響制御装置1の動作モードを切り替えるためのスイッチである。モード切替スイッチ4を押下することによって、音響制御装置1の動作モードは、ノーマルモードとアシストモードとの間で切り替わる。
[Mode selection switch configuration]
The mode changeover switch 4 shown in FIG. 1 is a switch for switching the operation mode of the acoustic control device 1. By pressing the mode changeover switch 4, the operation mode of the acoustic control device 1 is switched between normal mode and assist mode.
 [クロスフェーダーの構成]
 図1に示すクロスフェーダー5は、左右に移動可能なフェーダー操作子51を有し、第1チャンネルにロードされた第1楽曲の音量と、第2チャンネルにロードされた第2楽曲の音量とのバランスを調節する操作子である。後述するノーマルモードでは、フェーダー操作子51が左方に移動されるに従って、音響制御装置1から出力される音量において第1楽曲の音量の割合が大きくなる。フェーダー操作子51が右方に移動されるに従って、音響制御装置1から出力される音量において第2楽曲の音量の割合が大きくなる。
 具体的に、フェーダー操作子51が左端に配置されている場合には、第1楽曲の音量が最大となり、第2楽曲の音量が最小となる。フェーダー操作子51が右端に配置されている場合には、第1楽曲の音量が最小となり、第2楽曲の音量が最大となる。
 以下、フェーダー操作子51の操作可能範囲RCにおける両端のうち、一方の端部を第1端部TC1といい、他方の端部を第2端部TC2という。本実施形態では、フェーダー操作子51の移動方向が左右方向であるので、第1端部TC1は、操作可能範囲RCにおける左端であり、第2端部TC2は、操作可能範囲RCにおける右端である。
[Crossfader configuration]
The crossfader 5 shown in FIG. 1 has a fader operator 51 that can be moved left and right, and the volume of the first song loaded on the first channel is different from the volume of the second song loaded on the second channel. This is an operator that adjusts the balance. In the normal mode, which will be described later, as the fader operator 51 is moved to the left, the proportion of the volume of the first music piece in the volume output from the audio control device 1 increases. As the fader operator 51 is moved to the right, the proportion of the volume of the second music piece in the volume output from the audio control device 1 increases.
Specifically, when the fader operator 51 is placed at the left end, the volume of the first song is the maximum, and the volume of the second song is the minimum. When the fader operator 51 is placed at the right end, the volume of the first song is the minimum, and the volume of the second song is the maximum.
Hereinafter, among both ends of the operable range RC of the fader operator 51, one end will be referred to as a first end TC1, and the other end will be referred to as a second end TC2. In this embodiment, since the moving direction of the fader operator 51 is the left-right direction, the first end TC1 is the left end in the operable range RC, and the second end TC2 is the right end in the operable range RC. .
 [制御部の構成]
 図3は、制御部6の構成を示すブロック図である。
 制御部6は、CPU(Central Processing Unit)等のプロセッサーを少なくとも1つ有する回路基板によって構成され、図示しない記憶部にコンピューター読取可能に記憶された音響制御プログラムを読み込んで処理する。すなわち、制御部6を構成するプロセッサーは、コンピューターであり、制御部6は、音響制御プログラムに基づいて音響制御装置1の動作を制御する。具体的に、制御部6は、各チャンネルにロードされた楽曲を再生する他、クロスフェーダー5及びチャンネルフェーダー33A,33Bに対する操作に基づいて、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のミックス状態を調節する。
 このような制御部6は、図3に示すように、第1再生部61、第2再生部62、位置取得部63、モード切替部64、音量調節部65及びBPM設定部66を有する。
[Configuration of control unit]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control section 6. As shown in FIG.
The control unit 6 is constituted by a circuit board having at least one processor such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit), and reads and processes an audio control program stored in a computer-readable manner in a storage unit (not shown). That is, the processor that constitutes the control section 6 is a computer, and the control section 6 controls the operation of the sound control device 1 based on a sound control program. Specifically, the control unit 6 not only reproduces the music loaded into each channel, but also adjusts the mix state of the first music and the second music based on operations on the crossfader 5 and channel faders 33A and 33B.
As shown in FIG. 3, the control section 6 includes a first playback section 61, a second playback section 62, a position acquisition section 63, a mode switching section 64, a volume adjustment section 65, and a BPM setting section 66.
 第1再生部61は、第1チャンネルにロードされた第1楽曲を再生する。具体的に、第1再生部61は、後述するBPM設定部66によって設定されたBPMにて第1楽曲を再生する。
 第2再生部62は、第2チャンネルにロードされた第2楽曲を再生する。具体的に、第2再生部62は、後述するBPM設定部66によって設定されたBPMにて第2楽曲を再生する。
 なお、後述する第1楽曲のBPMは、第1テンポスライダー34Aによって第1楽曲の再生時BPMが調節されている場合には、調節後の再生時BPMであり、第1テンポスライダー34Aによって第1楽曲の再生時BPMが調節されていない場合には、第1楽曲の原曲のBPMである。同様に、後述する第2楽曲のBPMは、第2テンポスライダー34Bによって第2楽曲の再生時BPMが調節されている場合には、調節後の再生時BPMであり、第2テンポスライダー34Bによって第2楽曲の再生時BPMが調節されていない場合には、第2楽曲の原曲のBPMである。
The first playback section 61 plays back the first song loaded onto the first channel. Specifically, the first playback unit 61 plays the first music piece at a BPM set by a BPM setting unit 66, which will be described later.
The second reproduction unit 62 reproduces the second music loaded on the second channel. Specifically, the second reproduction section 62 reproduces the second music at the BPM set by a BPM setting section 66, which will be described later.
Note that the BPM of the first song, which will be described later, is the adjusted BPM when playing the first song when the BPM when playing the first song is adjusted by the first tempo slider 34A; If the BPM is not adjusted when playing the music, it is the BPM of the original music of the first music. Similarly, the BPM of the second song, which will be described later, is the adjusted BPM when playing back the second song when the second tempo slider 34B adjusts the BPM when playing the second song. If the BPM is not adjusted when the two songs are played, the BPM is the BPM of the original song of the second song.
 位置取得部63は、各操作子の位置を取得する。例えば、位置取得部63は、各チャンネルフェーダー33の操作可能範囲におけるフェーダー操作子331の位置、各テンポスライダー34の操作可能範囲における位置、及び、クロスフェーダー5の操作可能範囲におけるフェーダー操作子51の位置を取得する。
 詳述すると、位置取得部63は、第1操作子33A1の操作可能範囲において後述する第1端部TA1に位置するときを0とし、後述する第2端部TA2に位置するときを1とした場合の第1操作子33A1の位置を示す数値を取得する。同様に、位置取得部63は、第2操作子33B1の操作可能範囲において後述する第1端部TB1に位置するときを0とし、後述する第2端部TB2に位置するときを1とした場合の第2操作子33B1の位置を示す数値を取得する。
 また、位置取得部63は、フェーダー操作子51の操作可能範囲において後述する第1端部TC1に位置するときを0とし、後述する第2端部TC2に位置するときを1とした場合における第1端部TC1に対するフェーダー操作子51の相対位置を示す数値を取得する。
The position acquisition unit 63 acquires the position of each operator. For example, the position acquisition unit 63 determines the position of the fader operator 331 in the operable range of each channel fader 33, the position of each tempo slider 34 in the operable range, and the position of the fader operator 51 in the operable range of the crossfader 5. Get location.
To be more specific, the position acquisition unit 63 sets the value to 0 when it is located at a first end TA1 (described later) in the operable range of the first operator 33A1, and sets it to 1 when it is located at a second end TA2 (described later). A numerical value indicating the position of the first operator 33A1 in the case is acquired. Similarly, the position acquisition unit 63 sets 0 when the second controller 33B1 is located at a first end TB1 (described later) in the operable range, and 1 when the second controller 33B1 is located at a second end TB2 (described later). A numerical value indicating the position of the second operator 33B1 is acquired.
In addition, the position acquisition unit 63 sets the position of the fader operator 51 to 0 when it is located at a first end TC1 (described later) and 1 when it is located at a second end TC2 (described later) in the operable range of the fader operator 51. A numerical value indicating the relative position of the fader operator 51 with respect to the first end TC1 is acquired.
 モード切替部64は、モード切替スイッチ4に対する入力操作に応じて、音響制御装置1の動作モードを、ノーマルモードとアシストモードとの間で切り替える。詳しくは後述するが、ノーマルモードは、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とをミックスするときに、音響制御装置1がアシストしないモードである。アシストモードは、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とをミックスするときに、違和感のないミックスを音響制御装置1がアシストするモードである。 The mode switching unit 64 switches the operating mode of the acoustic control device 1 between normal mode and assist mode in response to an input operation on the mode selector switch 4. Although details will be described later, the normal mode is a mode in which the audio control device 1 does not assist when mixing the first music and the second music. The assist mode is a mode in which the sound control device 1 assists in mixing the first music and the second music without causing any discomfort.
 [音量調節部の機能]
 音量調節部65は、位置取得部63によって取得されたフェーダー操作子51及び各操作子33A1,33B1の位置に基づいて、第1チャンネルから出力する第1楽曲の音量、及び、第2チャンネルから出力される第2楽曲の音量を調節する他、第1楽曲の音量と第2楽曲の音量とのバランスを調節する。具体的に、音量調節部65は、フェーダー操作子51の位置に応じて、第1楽曲の音量と第2楽曲の音量とのバランスを調節する。また、音量調節部65は、第1チャンネルフェーダー33Aの第1操作子33A1の位置に応じて第1楽曲の音量を調節し、第2チャンネルフェーダー33Bの第2操作子33B1の位置に応じて第2楽曲の音量を調節する。
 なお、フェーダー操作子51を操作した場合の各楽曲の音量調節、及び、各操作子33A1,33B1を操作した場合の各楽曲の音量調節については、後に詳述する。
[Volume control function]
The volume adjustment unit 65 adjusts the volume of the first music piece to be output from the first channel and the volume to be output from the second channel based on the positions of the fader operator 51 and each operator 33A1, 33B1 acquired by the position acquisition unit 63. In addition to adjusting the volume of the second song played, the balance between the volume of the first song and the volume of the second song is adjusted. Specifically, the volume adjustment section 65 adjusts the balance between the volume of the first song and the volume of the second song according to the position of the fader operator 51. Further, the volume adjustment section 65 adjusts the volume of the first music according to the position of the first operator 33A1 of the first channel fader 33A, and adjusts the volume of the first music according to the position of the second operator 33B1 of the second channel fader 33B. 2 Adjust the volume of the songs.
The volume adjustment of each song when the fader operator 51 is operated and the volume adjustment of each song when the operators 33A1 and 33B1 are operated will be described in detail later.
 [BPM設定部の機能]
 BPM設定部66は、第1再生部61によって再生される第1楽曲の再生時BPMを設定する他、第2再生部62によって再生される第2楽曲の再生時BPMを設定する。
 具体的に、音響制御装置1の動作モードがノーマルモードである場合には、BPM設定部66は、第1テンポスライダー34Aの操作に応じて、第1楽曲の再生時BPMを設定する他、第2テンポスライダー34Bの操作に応じて、第2楽曲の再生時BPMを設定する。
 音響制御装置1の動作モードがアシストモードである場合、BPM設定部66は、フェーダー操作子51の位置に応じて第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMを設定する。また、音響制御装置1の動作モードがアシストモードである場合、BPM設定部66は、第1操作子33A1の位置に応じて第1楽曲の再生時BPMを設定し、第2操作子33B1の位置に応じて第2楽曲の再生時BPMを設定する。
 上記のように、第1再生部61は、BPM設定部66によって設定された再生時BPMにて第1楽曲を再生し、第2再生部62は、BPM設定部66によって設定された再生時BPMにて第2楽曲を再生する。
[Function of BPM setting section]
The BPM setting unit 66 not only sets the BPM when playing the first music piece played by the first playback unit 61 but also sets the BPM when playing the second music piece played by the second playback unit 62.
Specifically, when the operation mode of the sound control device 1 is the normal mode, the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM during playback of the first music piece according to the operation of the first tempo slider 34A, and also sets the BPM when the first music piece is played back. The BPM at the time of reproduction of the second music piece is set according to the operation of the second tempo slider 34B.
When the operation mode of the sound control device 1 is the assist mode, the BPM setting section 66 sets the BPM for each of the first music piece and the second music piece during playback according to the position of the fader operator 51. Further, when the operation mode of the sound control device 1 is the assist mode, the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM during playback of the first music according to the position of the first operator 33A1, and The BPM at the time of reproduction of the second music is set according to the following.
As described above, the first playback section 61 plays the first song at the playback BPM set by the BPM setting section 66, and the second playback section 62 plays the first song at the playback BPM set by the BPM setting section 66. Play the second song.
 [クロスフェーダーを操作したときの処理]
 図4は、クロスフェーダー5を操作した場合の第1楽曲全体の音量の変化と第2楽曲全体の音量の変化とを示す図である。図4において、グラフにおける横軸には、位置取得部63によって取得されるフェーダー操作子51の相対位置を示す数値が設定されている。
 音量調節部65は、操作可能範囲におけるクロスフェーダー5のフェーダー操作子51の位置に基づいて、第1楽曲全体の音量と第2楽曲全体の音量とのバランスを調節する。なお、第1楽曲全体の音量とは、第1楽曲の高周波帯域の音量と、中周波帯域の音量と、低周波帯域の音量との全ての音量を示す。第1楽曲全体の音量の最大値は、第1操作子33A1によって設定された第1設定済音量V1stである。第1楽曲における高周波帯域、中周波帯域及び低周波帯域のバランスは、高周波帯域の設定済レベルH1lvと、中周波帯域の設定済レベルM1lvと、低周波帯域の設定済レベルL1lvとの比率に対応している。第2楽曲全体の音量も同様であり、第2楽曲全体の音量の最大値は、第2操作子33B1によって設定された第2設定済音量V2stである。第2楽曲における高周波帯域、中周波帯域及び低周波帯域のバランスは、高周波帯域の設定済レベルH2lvと、中周波帯域の設定済レベルM2lvと、低周波帯域の設定済レベルL2lvとの比率に対応している。
 なお、第1端部TC1から第2端部TC2に向かう方向を+DC方向とし、第2端部TC2から第1端部TC1に向かう方向を-DC方向とする。
[Processing when operating the crossfader]
FIG. 4 is a diagram showing changes in the volume of the entire first song and changes in the volume of the entire second song when the crossfader 5 is operated. In FIG. 4, a numerical value indicating the relative position of the fader operator 51 acquired by the position acquisition unit 63 is set on the horizontal axis of the graph.
The volume adjustment section 65 adjusts the balance between the volume of the entire first music piece and the volume of the entire second music piece based on the position of the fader operator 51 of the crossfader 5 within the operable range. Note that the volume of the entire first song refers to all the volumes of the first song, including the volume of the high frequency band, the volume of the medium frequency band, and the volume of the low frequency band. The maximum value of the volume of the entire first music piece is the first set volume V1st set by the first operator 33A1. The balance between the high frequency band, medium frequency band, and low frequency band in the first song corresponds to the ratio of the set level H1lv of the high frequency band, the set level M1lv of the middle frequency band, and the set level L1lv of the low frequency band. are doing. The same applies to the volume of the entire second music piece, and the maximum value of the volume of the entire second music piece is the second set volume V2st set by the second operator 33B1. The balance between the high frequency band, medium frequency band, and low frequency band in the second song corresponds to the ratio of the set level H2lv of the high frequency band, the set level M2lv of the middle frequency band, and the set level L2lv of the low frequency band. are doing.
Note that the direction from the first end TC1 to the second end TC2 is the +DC direction, and the direction from the second end TC2 to the first end TC1 is the -DC direction.
 フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1に配置されていると、音量調節部65は、図4に示すように、第1楽曲全体の音量を上記した第1設定済音量V1stとし、第2楽曲全体の音量を第2最小音量V2minとする。
 音量調節部65は、フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1から+DC方向に操作されるに従って、第1楽曲全体の音量を低下させ、第2楽曲全体の音量を増加させる。換言すると、音量調節部65は、フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2から-DC方向に操作されるに従って、第1楽曲全体の音量を増加させ、第2楽曲全体の音量を低下させる。
 すなわち、フェーダー操作子51が+DC方向に操作されるに従って、音響制御装置1から出力される音量に占める第2楽曲の割合が大きくなる。フェーダー操作子51が-DC方向に操作されるに従って、音響制御装置1から出力される音量に占める第1楽曲の割合が大きくなる。
When the fader operator 51 is arranged at the first end TC1, the volume adjustment section 65 sets the volume of the entire first song to the above-mentioned first set volume V1st, as shown in FIG. The overall volume is set to the second minimum volume V2min.
The volume adjustment section 65 decreases the volume of the entire first music piece and increases the volume of the entire second music piece as the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction from the first end TC1. In other words, the volume adjustment section 65 increases the volume of the entire first song and decreases the volume of the entire second song as the fader operator 51 is operated from the second end TC2 in the −DC direction.
That is, as the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction, the ratio of the second music piece to the volume output from the audio control device 1 increases. As the fader operator 51 is operated in the −DC direction, the ratio of the first music piece to the volume output from the audio control device 1 increases.
 音量調節部65は、フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2に配置されている場合、第1楽曲全体の音量を第1最小音量V1minとし、第2楽曲全体の音量を上記した第2設定済音量V2stとする。
 このように、操作可能範囲RCにおけるフェーダー操作子51の位置に応じて、第1楽曲全体の音量及び第2楽曲全体の音量が調節される。そして、フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1から第2端部TC2に操作されることによって、出力される楽曲が第1楽曲から第2楽曲に入れ替わる。フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2から第1端部TC1に操作されることによって、出力される楽曲が第2楽曲から第1楽曲に入れ替わる。
When the fader operator 51 is disposed at the second end TC2, the volume adjustment section 65 sets the volume of the entire first music piece to a first minimum volume V1min, and sets the volume of the entire second music piece to the second setting as described above. The volume is set to V2st.
In this way, the volume of the entire first music piece and the volume of the entire second music piece are adjusted according to the position of the fader operator 51 in the operable range RC. Then, by operating the fader operator 51 from the first end TC1 to the second end TC2, the output music is switched from the first music to the second music. By operating the fader operator 51 from the second end TC2 to the first end TC1, the output music is switched from the second music to the first music.
 ここで、クロスフェーダー5を操作した場合の各楽曲の各周波数帯域の音量レベルについて説明する。
 上記のように、楽曲全体の音量は、高周波帯域の設定済レベルに応じた強度の高周波帯域の信号と、中周波帯域の設定済レベルに応じた強度の中周波帯域の信号と、低周波帯域の設定済レベルに応じた強度の低周波帯域の信号とを、フェーダー操作子331の位置に応じた増幅率で増幅することによって決定される。換言すると、フェーダー操作子331の位置が変更されない場合には、設定済レベルを上限として各周波数帯域の音量レベルを変化させることによって、各楽曲全体の音量、ひいては、各楽曲の音量バランスが調節される。
Here, the volume level of each frequency band of each song when the crossfader 5 is operated will be explained.
As mentioned above, the volume of the entire song is determined by a high frequency band signal with a strength corresponding to the preset level of the high frequency band, a medium frequency band signal with a strength corresponding to the preset level of the medium frequency band, and a low frequency band signal with a strength corresponding to the preset level of the medium frequency band. It is determined by amplifying a signal in a low frequency band whose intensity corresponds to the preset level of , with an amplification factor corresponding to the position of the fader operator 331 . In other words, if the position of the fader operator 331 is not changed, by changing the volume level of each frequency band with the set level as the upper limit, the overall volume of each song, and by extension the volume balance of each song, is adjusted. Ru.
 図5は、クロスフェーダー5を操作した場合の第1楽曲の各周波数帯域の音量レベルの変化と第2楽曲の各周波数帯域の音量レベルの変化とを示す図である。詳述すると、図5の上から1段目には、フェーダー操作子51の位置が示され、2段目には、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの高周波帯域の音量レベルが示されている。図5の上から3段目には、各楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルが示され、4段目には、各楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルが示されている。なお、図5の2段目、3段目及び4段目に示すグラフにおける横軸には、上記したフェーダー操作子51の相対位置を示す数値が設定されている。なお、図5では、設定済レベルH1lvと設定済レベルH2lvとは、同じ値として図示されているが、必ずしも設定済レベルH1lvと設定済レベルH2lvとは、同じ値でなくてもよい。設定済レベルM1lv,M2lvも同様であり、設定済レベルL1lv,L2lvも同様である。
 音量調節部65は、図5に示すように、フェーダー操作子51の位置に応じて、各楽曲の各周波数帯域の音量レベルを変化させることによって、図4に示したように各楽曲全体の音量を調節する。
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing changes in the volume level of each frequency band of the first song and changes in the volume level of each frequency band of the second song when the crossfader 5 is operated. To be more specific, the first row from the top of FIG. 5 shows the position of the fader operator 51, and the second row shows the volume level of each high frequency band of the first song and the second song. There is. The third row from the top of FIG. 5 shows the volume level of the medium frequency band of each song, and the fourth row shows the volume level of the low frequency band of each song. Note that on the horizontal axes of the graphs shown in the second, third, and fourth rows of FIG. 5, numerical values indicating the relative positions of the fader operators 51 described above are set. Note that although the set level H1lv and the set level H2lv are shown as the same value in FIG. 5, the set level H1lv and the set level H2lv do not necessarily have to be the same value. The same goes for the set levels M1lv and M2lv, and the same goes for the set levels L1lv and L2lv.
As shown in FIG. 5, the volume adjustment section 65 adjusts the overall volume of each song as shown in FIG. 4 by changing the volume level of each frequency band of each song according to the position of the fader operator 51. Adjust.
 具体的に、音量調節部65は、図5の1段目及び2段目に示すように、操作可能範囲RCにおけるフェーダー操作子51の位置に応じて、第1楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルを最小レベルH1min以上、設定済レベルH1lv以下の範囲にて変化させ、第2楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルを最小レベルH2min以上、設定済レベルH2lv以下の範囲にて変化させる。すなわち、音量調節部65は、フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1から+DC方向に操作されるに従って、第1楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルを最小レベルH1minから設定済レベルH1lvを上限として増加させるとともに、第2楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルH2lvから最小レベルH2minを下限として低下させる。 Specifically, as shown in the first and second rows in FIG. The volume level of the high frequency band of the second music piece is varied within the range of the minimum level H1min to above the preset level H1lv, and the volume level of the high frequency band of the second song is varied within the range of the minimum level H2min to below the preset level H2lv. That is, as the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction from the first end TC1, the volume adjustment section 65 increases the volume level of the high frequency band of the first music piece from the minimum level H1min to the preset level H1lv as the upper limit. At the same time, the volume level of the high frequency band of the second music is lowered from the set level H2lv to the minimum level H2min as the lower limit.
 同様に、音量調節部65は、図5の3段目及び4段目に示すように、操作可能範囲RCにおけるフェーダー操作子51の位置に応じて、第1楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルを最小レベルM1min以上、設定済レベルM1lv以下の範囲にて変化させ、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを最小レベルL1min以上、設定済レベルL1lv以下の範囲にて変化させ、第2楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルを最小レベルM2min以上、設定済レベルM2lv以下の範囲にて変化させ、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを最小レベルL2min以上、設定済レベルL2lv以下の範囲にて変化させる。すなわち、音量調節部65は、フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1から+DC方向に操作されるに従って、第1楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルを最小レベルM1minから設定済レベルM1lvを上限として増加させるとともに、第2楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルM2lvから最小レベルM2minを下限として低下させる。また、音量調節部65は、フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1から+DC方向に操作されるに従って、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを最小レベルL1minから設定済レベルL1lvを上限として増加させるとともに、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルL2lvから最小レベルL2minを下限として低下させる。
 このように、音量調節部65が、各楽曲の各周波数帯域の音量レベルを、フェーダー操作子51の位置に応じて最小レベルと設定済レベルとの間で調節することによって、第1楽曲の音量と第2楽曲の音量とが調節され、各楽曲の音量バランスが調節される。
Similarly, as shown in the third and fourth rows of FIG. The volume level of the low frequency band of the first song is varied within the range of the minimum level L1min or more and the preset level L1lv or less, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song is changed within the range of the minimum level L1min or more and the preset level L1lv or less. The volume level of the frequency band is changed in the range of the minimum level M2min or more and the preset level M2lv or less, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song is changed in the range of the minimum level L2min or more and the preset level L2lv or less. . That is, as the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction from the first end TC1, the volume adjustment section 65 increases the volume level of the medium frequency band of the first song from the minimum level M1min to the preset level M1lv as the upper limit. At the same time, the volume level of the middle frequency band of the second song is lowered from the set level M2lv to the minimum level M2min as the lower limit. In addition, as the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction from the first end TC1, the volume adjustment section 65 increases the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song from the minimum level L1min to the preset level L1lv as the upper limit. At the same time, the volume level of the low frequency band of the second music piece is lowered from the set level L2lv to the minimum level L2min as the lower limit.
In this way, the volume adjustment section 65 adjusts the volume level of each frequency band of each song between the minimum level and the preset level according to the position of the fader operator 51, thereby adjusting the volume of the first song. and the volume of the second song are adjusted, and the volume balance of each song is adjusted.
 図6は、アシストモードでの第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMの変化の一例を示す図である。具体的に、図6は、第1楽曲のBPMが100であり、第2楽曲のBPMが120であるときに、アシストモードにてクロスフェーダー5を操作した場合の第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMの変化を示す図である。なお、図6に示すグラフにおける横軸には、上記したフェーダー操作子51の相対位置を示す数値が設定されている。
 BPM設定部66は、音響制御装置1の動作モードがアシストモードである場合に、図6に示すように、フェーダー操作子51の位置に応じて各楽曲の再生時BPMを設定する。以下、アシストモードにおけるBPM設定部66による再生時BPMの設定について説明する。
FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change in BPM during reproduction of the first music piece and the second music piece in the assist mode. Specifically, FIG. 6 shows the results of the first and second songs when the crossfader 5 is operated in assist mode when the BPM of the first song is 100 and the BPM of the second song is 120. It is a figure which shows the change of BPM at the time of each reproduction|regeneration. Note that on the horizontal axis of the graph shown in FIG. 6, a numerical value indicating the relative position of the fader operator 51 described above is set.
The BPM setting section 66 sets the BPM of each song during playback according to the position of the fader operator 51, as shown in FIG. 6, when the operation mode of the audio control device 1 is the assist mode. Hereinafter, the setting of BPM during playback by the BPM setting section 66 in the assist mode will be explained.
 フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1から第2端部TC2に向かう+DC方向に操作されるに従って、BPM設定部66は、第1楽曲のBPMから第2楽曲のBPMに近づくように、各楽曲の再生時BPMを設定する。
 そして、フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2に配置されると、BPM設定部66は、各楽曲の再生時BPMを、第2楽曲のBPMとする。図6の例では、各楽曲の再生時BPMは、120に設定される。
 フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2から第1端部TC1に向かう-DC方向に操作されるに従って、BPM設定部66は、第2楽曲のBPMから第1楽曲のBPMに近づくように、各楽曲の再生時BPMを設定する。
 そして、フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1に配置されると、BPM設定部66は、各楽曲の再生時BPMを、第1楽曲のBPMとする。図6の例では、各楽曲の再生時BPMは、第1楽曲のBPMである100に設定される。
As the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction from the first end TC1 to the second end TC2, the BPM setting section 66 changes the BPM of each song so that the BPM of the first song approaches the BPM of the second song. Set the BPM when playing.
Then, when the fader operator 51 is placed at the second end TC2, the BPM setting section 66 sets the BPM of the second song as the BPM during playback of each song. In the example of FIG. 6, the BPM during playback of each song is set to 120.
As the fader operator 51 is operated in the -DC direction from the second end TC2 to the first end TC1, the BPM setting section 66 changes the BPM of each song so that the BPM of the second song approaches the BPM of the first song. Set the BPM when playing music.
Then, when the fader operator 51 is placed at the first end TC1, the BPM setting section 66 sets the BPM of each song during playback to the BPM of the first song. In the example of FIG. 6, the playback BPM of each song is set to 100, which is the BPM of the first song.
 フェーダー操作子51が操作可能範囲RCの中間位置に配置された場合には、BPM設定部66は、各楽曲の再生時BPMを第1楽曲のBPMと第2楽曲のBPMとの中間値に設定する。
 フェーダー操作子51が±DC方向に操作されたときの再生時BPMの変化率は、図6の例では一定であるが、一定でなくてもよい。例えば当該変化率は、フェーダー操作子51が±DC方向に操作されるに従って変化してもよい。
 このようにフェーダー操作子51の操作に応じて、ミックスされる各楽曲の再生時BPMを揃えやすくすることができる。従って、違和感なく各楽曲を自然にミックスできる。
When the fader operator 51 is placed in the middle position of the operable range RC, the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM of each song during playback to an intermediate value between the BPM of the first song and the BPM of the second song. do.
Although the rate of change in BPM during reproduction when the fader operator 51 is operated in the ±DC direction is constant in the example of FIG. 6, it may not be constant. For example, the rate of change may change as the fader operator 51 is operated in the ±DC direction.
In this way, depending on the operation of the fader operator 51, it is possible to easily align the BPM of each piece of music to be mixed during playback. Therefore, each song can be mixed naturally without any discomfort.
 [チャンネルフェーダーを操作したときの処理]
 図7は、第1チャンネルフェーダー33Aを操作した場合の第1楽曲全体の音量の変化、及び、第2チャンネルフェーダー33Bを操作した場合の第2楽曲全体の音量の変化を示す図である。図7において、左側のグラフにおける縦軸には、各操作子33A1,33B1の相対位置を示す数値が設定されている。
 音量調節部65は、図7に示すように、第1チャンネルフェーダー33Aの第1操作子33A1の位置に基づいて、第1楽曲全体の音量を調節し、第2チャンネルフェーダー33Bの第2操作子33B1の位置に基づいて、第2楽曲全体の音量を調節する。すなわち、音量調節部65は、第1楽曲全体の音量である第1設定済音量V1stを、第1最小音量V1minと第1最大音量V1maxとの間で第1操作子33A1の位置に基づいて設定する。音量調節部65は、第2楽曲全体の音量である第2設定済音量V2stを、第2最小音量V2minと第2最大音量V2maxとの間で第2操作子33B1の位置に基づいて設定する。なお、第1最大音量V1maxは、音響制御装置1から出力可能な第1楽曲全体の最大音量であり、第2最大音量V2maxは、音響制御装置1から出力可能な第2楽曲全体の最大音量である。
[Processing when operating the channel fader]
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the volume of the entire first song when the first channel fader 33A is operated, and changes in the volume of the entire second song when the second channel fader 33B is operated. In FIG. 7, numerical values indicating the relative positions of the respective operators 33A1 and 33B1 are set on the vertical axis of the left graph.
As shown in FIG. 7, the volume adjustment section 65 adjusts the volume of the entire first music piece based on the position of the first operator 33A1 of the first channel fader 33A, and adjusts the volume of the entire first music piece based on the position of the first operator 33A1 of the first channel fader 33A. Based on the position of 33B1, the volume of the entire second music piece is adjusted. That is, the volume adjustment unit 65 sets the first set volume V1st, which is the volume of the entire first music piece, between the first minimum volume V1min and the first maximum volume V1max based on the position of the first controller 33A1. do. The volume adjustment unit 65 sets a second set volume V2st, which is the volume of the entire second music piece, between the second minimum volume V2min and the second maximum volume V2max based on the position of the second operator 33B1. Note that the first maximum volume V1max is the maximum volume of the entire first song that can be output from the audio control device 1, and the second maximum volume V2max is the maximum volume of the entire second song that can be output from the audio control device 1. be.
 以下、第1操作子33A1の操作可能範囲RAにおける両端のうち、一方の端部を第1端部TA1とし、他方の端部を第2端部TA2とする。第1端部TA1から第2端部TA2に向かう方向を+DA方向とし、第2端部TA2から第1端部TA1に向かう方向を-DA方向とする。また、第2操作子33B1の操作可能範囲RBにおける一方の端部を第1端部TB1とし、他方の端部を第2端部TB2とする。第1端部TB1から第2端部TB2に向かう方向を+DB方向とし、第2端部TB2から第1端部TB1に向かう方向を-DB方向とする。
 本実施形態では、+DA方向及び+DB方向が上方向に沿うことから、第1端部TA1,TB1は、操作可能範囲RA,RBにおける下端であり、第2端部TA2,TB2は、操作可能範囲RA,RBにおける上端である。
Hereinafter, among both ends of the operable range RA of the first operator 33A1, one end will be referred to as a first end TA1, and the other end will be referred to as a second end TA2. The direction from the first end TA1 to the second end TA2 is the +DA direction, and the direction from the second end TA2 to the first end TA1 is the -DA direction. Furthermore, one end of the operable range RB of the second operator 33B1 is defined as a first end TB1, and the other end is defined as a second end TB2. The direction from the first end TB1 to the second end TB2 is the +DB direction, and the direction from the second end TB2 to the first end TB1 is the -DB direction.
In this embodiment, since the +DA direction and the +DB direction are along the upward direction, the first ends TA1 and TB1 are the lower ends of the operable ranges RA and RB, and the second ends TA2 and TB2 are the lower ends of the operable ranges RA and RB. This is the upper end of RA and RB.
 具体的に、第1操作子33A1が第1端部TA1に配置されると、音量調節部65は、図7に示すように、第1設定済音量V1stを第1最小音量V1minとする。これにより、第1楽曲全体の音量は、第1最小音量V1minとなる。 Specifically, when the first operator 33A1 is placed at the first end TA1, the volume adjustment section 65 sets the first set volume V1st to the first minimum volume V1min, as shown in FIG. As a result, the volume of the entire first music piece becomes the first minimum volume V1min.
 第1操作子33A1が操作されると、音量調節部65は、第1設定済音量V1stを変化させる。すなわち、音量調節部65は、第1操作子33A1が+DA方向に操作されると、第1設定済音量V1stを増加させ、第1操作子33A1が-DA方向に操作されると、第1設定済音量V1stを低下させる。
 図7の例では、第1楽曲の全体音量の変化率は一定であり、第1操作子33A1の移動量と、第1設定済音量V1stの変化量及び第1楽曲の全体音量の変化量とは、正比例する。しかしながら、これに限らず、第1設定済音量V1stの変化率、及び、第1楽曲全体の音量の変化率は一定でなくてもよく、例えば第1操作子33A1が+DA方向又は-DA方向に操作されるに従って変化してもよい。
 第1操作子33A1が第2端部TA2に配置されると、音量調節部65は、第1設定済音量V1stを第1最大音量V1maxとする。これにより、第1楽曲全体の音量は、第1最大音量V1maxとなる。
When the first operator 33A1 is operated, the volume adjustment section 65 changes the first set volume V1st. That is, when the first operator 33A1 is operated in the +DA direction, the volume adjustment unit 65 increases the first set volume V1st, and when the first operator 33A1 is operated in the -DA direction, the volume adjustment unit 65 increases the first set volume V1st. The completed volume V1st is decreased.
In the example of FIG. 7, the rate of change in the overall volume of the first song is constant, and the amount of movement of the first controller 33A1, the amount of change in the first set volume V1st, and the amount of change in the overall volume of the first song are is directly proportional. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rate of change of the first preset volume V1st and the rate of change of the volume of the entire first music piece may not be constant; for example, the first controller 33A1 may move in the +DA direction or -DA direction. It may change as it is operated.
When the first operator 33A1 is placed at the second end TA2, the volume adjustment section 65 sets the first set volume V1st to the first maximum volume V1max. As a result, the volume of the entire first music piece becomes the first maximum volume V1max.
 一方、第2操作子33B1が第1端部TB1に配置されると、音量調節部65は、第2設定済音量V2stを第2最小音量V2minとする。これにより、第2楽曲全体の音量は、第2最小音量V2minとなる。
 音量調節部65は、第2操作子33B1が操作されると、第2設定済音量V2stを変化させる。すなわち、第2操作子33B1が+DB方向に操作されると、音量調節部65は、第2操作子33B1の位置に応じて第2設定済音量V2stを増加させ、これにより、第2楽曲全体の音量を増加させる。また、第2操作子33B1が-DB方向に操作されると、音量調節部65は、第2操作子33B1の位置に応じて第2設定済音量を低下させ、これにより、第2楽曲全体の音量を低下させる。このとき、第2設定済音量V2stの変化率、及び、第2楽曲全体の音量の変化率のそれぞれは、図7に示した例では一定であるが、一定でなくてもよい。例えば、第2設定済音量V2stの変化率、及び、第2楽曲全体の音量の変化率のそれぞれはあってもよく、第2操作子33B1が+DA方向又は-DA方向に操作されるに従って変化してもよい。
 第2操作子33B1が第2端部TB2に配置されると、音量調節部65は、第2設定済音量V2stを第2最大音量V2maxとする。これにより、第2楽曲全体の音量は、第2最大音量V2maxとなる。
 従って、例えば第1操作子33A1が第2端部TA2に配置され、第2操作子33B1が第1端部TB1に配置された状態から、第1操作子33A1が-DA方向に操作され、第2操作子33B1が+DB方向に操作されることによって、音響制御装置1から出力される楽曲を、第1楽曲から第2楽曲に入れ替えることができる。
On the other hand, when the second operator 33B1 is placed at the first end TB1, the volume adjustment section 65 sets the second set volume V2st to the second minimum volume V2min. As a result, the volume of the entire second music piece becomes the second minimum volume V2min.
The volume adjustment section 65 changes the second set volume V2st when the second operator 33B1 is operated. That is, when the second operator 33B1 is operated in the +DB direction, the volume adjustment section 65 increases the second set volume V2st according to the position of the second operator 33B1, thereby increasing the volume of the entire second music piece. Increase volume. Further, when the second operator 33B1 is operated in the -DB direction, the volume adjustment section 65 lowers the second set volume according to the position of the second operator 33B1, thereby controlling the entire second music piece. Decrease volume. At this time, although the rate of change of the second set volume V2st and the rate of change of the volume of the entire second music piece are constant in the example shown in FIG. 7, they do not need to be constant. For example, the rate of change of the second set volume V2st and the rate of change of the volume of the second music as a whole may be different, and change as the second operator 33B1 is operated in the +DA direction or -DA direction. You can.
When the second operator 33B1 is placed at the second end TB2, the volume adjustment section 65 sets the second set volume V2st to the second maximum volume V2max. As a result, the volume of the entire second music piece becomes the second maximum volume V2max.
Therefore, for example, from a state in which the first operator 33A1 is arranged at the second end TA2 and the second operator 33B1 is arranged at the first end TB1, the first operator 33A1 is operated in the -DA direction, By operating the second operator 33B1 in the +DB direction, the music output from the audio control device 1 can be replaced from the first music to the second music.
 図8は、アシストモードでの第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMの変化の一例を示す図である。具体的に、図8は、第1楽曲のBPMが100であり、第2楽曲のBPMが120であるときに、アシストモードにて第1操作子33A1を操作した場合の第1楽曲の再生時BPMの変化と、第2操作子33B1を操作した場合の第2楽曲の再生時BPMの変化と、を説明する図である。
 音響制御装置1の動作モードがアシストモードである場合、BPM設定部66は、図8に示すように、第1操作子33A1の位置に応じて第1楽曲の再生時BPMを設定し、第2操作子33B1の位置に応じて第2楽曲の再生時BPMを設定する。詳述すると、BPM設定部66は、第1操作子33A1の位置を示す数値を第2操作子33B1の位置を示す数値によって除算した除算結果に応じたBPMに、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMを設定する。
FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change in BPM during playback of each of the first song and the second song in the assist mode. Specifically, FIG. 8 shows a state in which the first music piece is played when the first operator 33A1 is operated in assist mode when the BPM of the first music piece is 100 and the BPM of the second music piece is 120. It is a figure explaining the change of BPM, and the change of BPM at the time of reproduction|regeneration of the 2nd music when 2nd operator 33B1 is operated.
When the operation mode of the acoustic control device 1 is the assist mode, the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM during playback of the first music according to the position of the first operator 33A1, as shown in FIG. The BPM at the time of reproduction of the second music piece is set according to the position of the operator 33B1. To be more specific, the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM of the first music piece and the second music piece according to the division result obtained by dividing the numerical value indicating the position of the first operator 33A1 by the numerical value indicating the position of the second operator 33B1. Set the BPM for each playback.
 ここで、図示しない記憶部は、図8に示したグラフを予め記憶している。すなわち、記憶部は、除算結果の数値に対応するBPMを示すBPM変化情報を記憶している。詳述すると、記憶部は、BPM変化情報として、除算結果の数値が小さくなるに従って第2楽曲のBPMに近づき、除算結果の数値が大きくなるに従って第1楽曲のBPMに近づく関数を記憶している。なお、BPM変化情報として記憶部が記憶する関数は、図8に示すような一次関数でもよく、二次関数等の高次関数であってもよい。
 なお、上記音量調節部65は、第1操作子33A1の位置に基づいて、第1楽曲全体の音量を調節し、第2操作子33B1の位置に基づいて、第2楽曲全体の音量を調節している。このため、図示しない記憶部は、上記BPM変化情報に代えて、第1楽曲全体の音量を第2楽曲全体の音量によって除算した除算結果の数値に対応するBPMを示すBPM変化情報を記憶していてもよい。
Here, the storage unit (not shown) stores the graph shown in FIG. 8 in advance. That is, the storage unit stores BPM change information indicating the BPM corresponding to the numerical value of the division result. Specifically, the storage unit stores, as BPM change information, a function that approaches the BPM of the second song as the numerical value of the division result becomes smaller, and approaches the BPM of the first song as the numerical value of the division result increases. . Note that the function stored in the storage unit as BPM change information may be a linear function as shown in FIG. 8, or may be a high-order function such as a quadratic function.
The volume adjustment section 65 adjusts the volume of the entire first music piece based on the position of the first controller 33A1, and adjusts the volume of the entire second music piece based on the position of the second controller 33B1. ing. Therefore, instead of the BPM change information, the storage unit (not shown) stores BPM change information indicating the BPM corresponding to the numerical value of the division result obtained by dividing the volume of the entire first song by the volume of the entire second song. You can.
 このようなBPM変化情報に基づいて、BPM設定部66は、上記除算結果に応じたBPMを取得し、取得したBPMを各楽曲のBPMとする。
 このため、例えば第1操作子33A1が第1端部TA1に配置され、第2操作子33B1が第2端部TB2に配置されていると、BPM設定部66は、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMを第2楽曲のBPMとする。図8の例では、各楽曲の再生時BPMは、第2楽曲のBPMである120に設定される。
 一方、例えば第1操作子33A1が第2端部TA2に配置され、第2操作子33B1が第1端部TB1に配置されていると、BPM設定部66は、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMを第1楽曲のBPMとする。図8の例では、各楽曲の再生時BPMは、第1楽曲のBPMである100に設定される。
Based on such BPM change information, the BPM setting unit 66 acquires the BPM corresponding to the above-mentioned division result, and sets the acquired BPM as the BPM of each song.
Therefore, for example, if the first operator 33A1 is arranged at the first end TA1 and the second operator 33B1 is arranged at the second end TB2, the BPM setting section 66 Let the BPM at the time of each reproduction be the BPM of the second music piece. In the example of FIG. 8, the playback BPM of each song is set to 120, which is the BPM of the second song.
On the other hand, for example, when the first operator 33A1 is arranged at the second end TA2 and the second operator 33B1 is arranged at the first end TB1, the BPM setting section 66 sets the first music piece and the second music piece. Let the BPM of each playback be the BPM of the first music piece. In the example of FIG. 8, the playback BPM of each song is set to 100, which is the BPM of the first song.
 そして、第1操作子33A1が+DA方向に操作されるに従って、或いは、第2操作子33B1が-DB方向に操作されるに従って、各楽曲のBPMは、第1楽曲のBPMに近づく。また、第1操作子33A1が-DA方向に操作されるに従って、或いは、第2操作子33B1が+DB方向に操作されるに従って、各楽曲のBPMは、第2楽曲のBPMに近づく。 Then, as the first operator 33A1 is operated in the +DA direction or as the second operator 33B1 is operated in the -DB direction, the BPM of each song approaches the BPM of the first song. Furthermore, as the first operator 33A1 is operated in the -DA direction or as the second operator 33B1 is operated in the +DB direction, the BPM of each song approaches the BPM of the second song.
 [アシストモードの有用性]
 通常、DJプレイでは、BPMが比較的近い楽曲を選んでミックスして楽曲を繋げていく。しかしながら、BPMの概念を知らない初心者等の不慣れなユーザーでは、自分の好みの楽曲を選んでミックスする傾向があり、BPMが比較的離れた楽曲同士をミックスしてしまう場合がある。このような場合、前の楽曲と次の楽曲とのBPM差から、違和感が生じやすい。
 これに対し、音響制御装置1の動作モードをアシストモードに切り替え、フェーダー操作子51、又は、操作子33A1,33B1を操作することによって、各楽曲の再生時BPMを揃えることができる。従って、楽曲のBPMを気にせず好みの楽曲を選曲してミックスすることができ、上記した不慣れなユーザーがすぐにDJプレイを楽しむことができる。
[Usefulness of assist mode]
Normally, when DJing, people select songs with relatively similar BPMs and mix them together to connect the songs. However, inexperienced users such as beginners who do not know the concept of BPM tend to select and mix their favorite songs, and may end up mixing songs with relatively different BPMs. In such a case, the BPM difference between the previous song and the next song tends to create a sense of discomfort.
On the other hand, by switching the operation mode of the audio control device 1 to the assist mode and operating the fader operator 51 or the operators 33A1 and 33B1, the BPM of each song can be made the same during reproduction. Therefore, it is possible to select and mix a favorite song without worrying about the BPM of the song, and the above-mentioned inexperienced user can immediately enjoy DJ play.
 また、2つの楽曲をミックスする操作をフェーダー操作子51又は操作子33A1,33B1に対して実施しながら、各楽曲のBPMを調節するためにテンポスライダー34等の操作子を操作することは、初心者だけでなく経験者であっても難易度が高い。
 これに対し、音響制御装置1の動作モードがアシストモードに切り替えられた場合には、フェーダー操作子51又は操作子33A1,33B1を操作するだけで、楽曲のミックスとBPM調節とを同時に実施できる。従って、上記した不慣れなユーザーだけでなく、経験者にとってもアシストモードは有用である。
Furthermore, it is difficult for beginners to operate operators such as the tempo slider 34 to adjust the BPM of each song while performing the operation of mixing two songs using the fader operator 51 or the operators 33A1 and 33B1. The level of difficulty is high even for experienced users.
On the other hand, when the operation mode of the audio control device 1 is switched to the assist mode, music mixing and BPM adjustment can be performed simultaneously by simply operating the fader operator 51 or the operators 33A1 and 33B1. Therefore, the assist mode is useful not only for the above-mentioned inexperienced users but also for experienced users.
 [第1実施形態の効果]
 以上説明した本実施形態に係る音響制御装置1は、以下の効果を奏する。
 音響制御装置1は、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とをミキシングする。音響制御装置1は、音量調節部65及びBPM設定部66を備える。
 音量調節部65は、ユーザーによって操作されるフェーダー操作子51、第1操作子33A1及び第2操作子33B1の少なくともいずれかの操作子の位置に応じて、第1楽曲の音量と第2楽曲の音量とのバランスを調節する。
 BPM設定部66は、当該操作子の位置に応じて、第1楽曲の再生時BPMと第2楽曲の再生時BPMとを設定する。
 このような構成によれば、操作子に対するユーザーの操作に応じて、各楽曲の音量調節と再生時BPMの設定とを同時に行うことができる。すなわち、ユーザーが操作子を操作することによって、各楽曲の音量調節だけでなく、再生時BPMの調節を実施できる。従って、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とを違和感なく容易にミキシングできる。
[Effects of the first embodiment]
The sound control device 1 according to the present embodiment described above has the following effects.
The sound control device 1 mixes the first music and the second music. The sound control device 1 includes a volume adjustment section 65 and a BPM setting section 66.
The volume adjustment unit 65 adjusts the volume of the first music piece and the volume of the second music piece according to the position of at least one of the fader operator 51, the first operator 33A1, and the second operator 33B1 operated by the user. Adjust the balance with the volume.
The BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM when playing the first music and the BPM when playing the second music according to the position of the operator.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to simultaneously adjust the volume of each song and set the BPM during playback according to the user's operation on the operator. That is, by operating the controls, the user can not only adjust the volume of each song, but also adjust the BPM during playback. Therefore, the first music piece and the second music piece can be easily mixed without any discomfort.
 音響制御装置1では、音量調節部65は、フェーダー操作子51の操作可能範囲RCにおける第1端部TC1から第2端部TC2に向かう+DC方向にフェーダー操作子51が操作されるに従って、第1楽曲の音量を低下させ、第2楽曲の音量を増加させる。BPM設定部66は、フェーダー操作子51の操作可能範囲における第1端部TC1から第2端部TC2に向かう方向にフェーダー操作子51が操作されるに従って、第1楽曲の再生時BPM及び第2楽曲の再生時BPMを、第1楽曲のBPMから第2楽曲のBPMに近づける。
 このような構成によれば、音響制御装置1から出力される楽曲を第1楽曲から第2楽曲に入れ替える場合に、フェーダー操作子51を+DC方向に操作することによって、第1楽曲の音量を低下させ、第2楽曲の音量を増加させるとともに、第1楽曲の再生時BPM及び第2楽曲の再生時BPMを、音量が増加する第2楽曲のBPMに近づけることができる。従って、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とを違和感なく容易にミキシングできる。
In the sound control device 1, the volume control unit 65 adjusts the volume control unit 65 to the first level as the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction from the first end TC1 to the second end TC2 in the operable range RC of the fader operator 51. The volume of the song is decreased and the volume of the second song is increased. The BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM and the second BPM during playback of the first music piece as the fader operator 51 is operated in the direction from the first end TC1 to the second end TC2 in the operable range of the fader operator 51. To bring the BPM of a first piece of music closer to the BPM of a second piece of music when playing music.
According to such a configuration, when changing the music output from the audio control device 1 from the first music to the second music, the volume of the first music can be decreased by operating the fader operator 51 in the +DC direction. By increasing the volume of the second song, the BPM of the first song and the BPM of the second song can be brought closer to the BPM of the second song whose volume increases. Therefore, the first music and the second music can be easily mixed without any discomfort.
 音響制御装置1では、音量調節部65は、フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2に配置されると、第1楽曲全体の音量を最小音量V1minとし、第2楽曲全体の音量を第2設定済音量V2stとする。第2設定済音量V2stは、第2操作子33B1によって設定された第2楽曲全体の音量の最大値である。BPM設定部66は、フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2に配置されると、第1楽曲の再生時BPMと第2楽曲の再生時BPMとを、第2楽曲のBPMに設定する。
 このような構成によれば、フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2に配置された場合に、音量が第2設定済音量V2stとなる第2楽曲の再生時BPMに、第2楽曲のBPMを設定できる。従って、第1楽曲から第2楽曲に入れ替えたときに、第2楽曲のBPMにて第2楽曲を再生できる。
In the sound control device 1, when the fader operator 51 is placed at the second end TC2, the volume adjustment unit 65 sets the volume of the entire first song to the minimum volume V1min, and sets the volume of the entire second song to the second setting. The completed volume is set to V2st. The second set volume V2st is the maximum volume of the entire second music piece set by the second operator 33B1. When the fader operator 51 is placed at the second end TC2, the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM of the first music piece and the BPM of the second music piece to the BPM of the second music piece.
According to such a configuration, when the fader operator 51 is disposed at the second end TC2, the BPM of the second song is set as the BPM when the second song is played at which the volume becomes the second preset volume V2st. Can be set. Therefore, when replacing the first song with the second song, the second song can be played back at the BPM of the second song.
 音響制御装置1では、BPM設定部66は、フェーダー操作子51が操作可能範囲RCにおける中間位置に配置されると、第1楽曲の再生時BPM及び第2楽曲の再生時BPMのそれぞれを、第1楽曲のBPMと第2楽曲のBPMとの中間値に設定する。
 このような構成によれば、フェーダー操作子51の操作可能範囲において第1楽曲の再生時BPMと第2楽曲の再生時BPMとが上記中間値となる位置をユーザーが把握しやすくすることができる。従って、再生時BPMの調節時に操作子を操作しやすくすることができる。
In the sound control device 1, when the fader operator 51 is placed at an intermediate position in the operable range RC, the BPM setting unit 66 sets each of the BPM during playback of the first music piece and the BPM during playback of the second music piece. Set to an intermediate value between the BPM of the first song and the BPM of the second song.
According to such a configuration, it is possible for the user to easily grasp the position where the playback BPM of the first music piece and the playback BPM of the second music piece are the intermediate value in the operable range of the fader operator 51. . Therefore, the operator can be easily operated when adjusting the BPM during playback.
 音響制御装置1において、ユーザーが操作する操作子は、スライド可能なフェーダー操作子51を有するクロスフェーダー5である。
 このような構成によれば、フェーダー操作子51を操作することによって、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とを違和感なくミックスできる。従って、第1楽曲の再生時BPMを調節する操作子と、第2楽曲の再生時BPMを調節する操作子とを操作する場合に比べて、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とのミックス操作を容易に実施できる。
In the audio control device 1, the operator operated by the user is the crossfader 5 having a slideable fader operator 51.
According to such a configuration, by operating the fader operator 51, the first music and the second music can be mixed without any discomfort. Therefore, the mixing operation between the first and second songs is easier than when operating the operator that adjusts the BPM when playing the first song and the operator that adjusts the BPM when playing the second song. can be implemented.
 制御部6を構成するコンピューターである演算処理装置によって実行される音響制御プログラムは、コンピューター読取可能に記録され、コンピューターを上記音響制御装置1のとして機能させる。
 このような音響制御プログラムを音響制御装置1の演算処理装置が実行することによって、上記した効果を奏することができる。
The sound control program executed by the arithmetic processing unit, which is a computer constituting the control unit 6, is recorded in a computer-readable manner, and causes the computer to function as the sound control device 1 described above.
By executing such a sound control program by the arithmetic processing unit of the sound control device 1, the above-described effects can be achieved.
 [第2実施形態]
 次に、本発明の第2実施形態について説明する。
 本実施形態に係る音響制御装置は、第1実施形態に係る音響制御装置1と同様の構成を備えるが、動作モードがアシストモードである場合の音量調節部の動作が異なる。なお、以下の説明では、既に説明した部分と同一又は略同一である部分については、同一の符号を付して説明を省略する。
[Second embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The sound control device according to this embodiment has the same configuration as the sound control device 1 according to the first embodiment, but the operation of the volume adjustment section when the operation mode is the assist mode is different. In the following description, parts that are the same or substantially the same as parts that have already been described are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.
 図9は、本実施形態に係る音響制御装置が備える制御部6Aの構成を示すブロック図である。
 本実施形態に係る音響制御装置は、第1実施形態に係る制御部6に代えて、図9に示す制御部6Aを備える他は、第1実施形態に係る音響制御装置1と同様の構成及び機能を備える。
 制御部6Aは、制御部6と同様に、本実施形態に係る音響制御装置を制御するものであり、図示しない記憶部に記憶された音響制御プログラムを読み出して実行するCPU(Central Processing Unit)等のプロセッサーを備えて構成されている。すなわち、演算処理回路は、コンピューターである。
 制御部6Aは、第1実施形態に係る音量調節部65に代えて音量調節部65Aを備える他は、制御部6と同様の構成を備える。すなわち、制御部6Aは、第1再生部61、第2再生部62、位置取得部63、モード切替部64、音量調節部65A及びBPM設定部66を備える。
FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a control section 6A included in the acoustic control device according to the present embodiment.
The sound control device according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and structure as the sound control device 1 according to the first embodiment, except that it includes a control section 6A shown in FIG. 9 instead of the control section 6 according to the first embodiment. Equipped with functions.
Like the control unit 6, the control unit 6A controls the audio control device according to the present embodiment, and includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit), etc. that reads and executes an audio control program stored in a storage unit (not shown). Configured with 1 processor. That is, the arithmetic processing circuit is a computer.
The control section 6A has the same configuration as the control section 6 except that it includes a volume adjustment section 65A instead of the volume adjustment section 65 according to the first embodiment. That is, the control section 6A includes a first playback section 61, a second playback section 62, a position acquisition section 63, a mode switching section 64, a volume adjustment section 65A, and a BPM setting section 66.
 [音量調節部の構成]
 音響制御装置の動作モードがノーマルモードである場合、音量調節部65Aは、第1実施形態に係る音量調節部65と同様に機能する。
 音響制御装置の動作モードがアシストモードである場合、音量調節部65Aは、第1実施形態に係る音量調節部65とは異なり、第1楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量と、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量とを個別に調節するとともに、第2楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量と、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量とを個別に調節する。詳述すると、音量調節部65Aは、第1楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルと、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルとを個別に調節することによって、第1楽曲の各周波数帯域の音量を個別に調節する。音量調節部65Aは、第2楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルと、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルとを個別に調節することによって、第2楽曲の各周波数帯域の音量を個別に調節する。
[Configuration of volume control section]
When the operation mode of the sound control device is the normal mode, the volume adjustment section 65A functions similarly to the volume adjustment section 65 according to the first embodiment.
When the operation mode of the sound control device is the assist mode, unlike the volume adjustment unit 65 according to the first embodiment, the volume adjustment unit 65A adjusts the volume of each of the high frequency band and the medium frequency band of the first music, and the volume of the first music. The volume of the low frequency band of one song is individually adjusted, and the volume of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the second song, and the volume of the low frequency band of the second song are individually adjusted. To be more specific, the volume adjustment section 65A adjusts the volume level of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the first song, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song, thereby adjusting the volume level of the first song. Adjust the volume of each frequency band individually. The volume adjustment unit 65A adjusts the volume level of each frequency band of the second music by individually adjusting the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the second music and the volume level of the low frequency band of the second music. Adjust the volume individually.
 [アシストモードにてクロスフェーダーを操作した場合の音量調節]
 図10は、アシストモードでクロスフェーダー5を操作した場合の第1楽曲の各周波数帯域の音量レベルの変化と、第2楽曲の各周波数帯域の音量レベルの変化とを示す図である。図10に示すグラフにおける横軸には、上記したフェーダー操作子51の相対位置を示す数値が設定されている。また、図10では、設定済レベルH1lvと設定済レベルH2lvとは、同じ値として図示されているが、必ずしも設定済レベルH1lvと設定済レベルH2lvとは、同じ値でなくてもよい。設定済レベルM1lv,M2lvも同様であり、設定済レベルL1lv,L2lvも同様である。
 アシストモードでは、フェーダー操作子51の操作可能範囲RCは、図10に示すように、第1範囲RC1、第2範囲RC2及び第3範囲RC3を含む。
 第1範囲RC1は、第1位置PC1と第2位置PC2との間の範囲である。第2位置PC2は、第1位置PC1に対して+DC方向に設定されている。
 第2範囲RC2は、第2位置PC2と第3位置PC3との間の範囲である。第3位置PC3は、第2位置PC2に対して+DC方向に設定されている。
 第3範囲RC3は、第3位置PC3と第4位置PC4との間の範囲である。第4位置PC4は、第3位置PC3に対して+DC方向に設定されている。
 本実施形態では、第1位置PC1は、第1端部TC1に設定されており、第4位置PC4は、第2端部TC2に設定されている。第1範囲RC1は、第1端部TC1から操作可能範囲RCにおける1/3の範囲であり、第2範囲RC2は、第2位置PC2から操作可能範囲RCにおける1/3の範囲であり、第3範囲RC3は、第3位置PC3から操作可能範囲RCにおける1/3の範囲である。
[Volume adjustment when operating the crossfader in assist mode]
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing changes in the volume level of each frequency band of the first song and changes in the volume level of each frequency band of the second song when the crossfader 5 is operated in the assist mode. On the horizontal axis of the graph shown in FIG. 10, numerical values indicating the relative positions of the fader operators 51 described above are set. Further, in FIG. 10, the set level H1lv and the set level H2lv are shown as the same value, but the set level H1lv and the set level H2lv do not necessarily have to be the same value. The same goes for the set levels M1lv and M2lv, and the same goes for the set levels L1lv and L2lv.
In the assist mode, the operable range RC of the fader operator 51 includes a first range RC1, a second range RC2, and a third range RC3, as shown in FIG.
The first range RC1 is a range between the first position PC1 and the second position PC2. The second position PC2 is set in the +DC direction with respect to the first position PC1.
The second range RC2 is a range between the second position PC2 and the third position PC3. The third position PC3 is set in the +DC direction with respect to the second position PC2.
The third range RC3 is a range between the third position PC3 and the fourth position PC4. The fourth position PC4 is set in the +DC direction with respect to the third position PC3.
In this embodiment, the first position PC1 is set at the first end TC1, and the fourth position PC4 is set at the second end TC2. The first range RC1 is 1/3 of the operable range RC from the first end TC1, and the second range RC2 is 1/3 of the operable range RC from the second position PC2. The third range RC3 is 1/3 of the operable range RC from the third position PC3.
 動作モードがアシストモードであり、フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1に配置されている場合、音量調節部65Aは、図10に示すように、第1楽曲の各波長帯域の音量レベルを、第1楽曲の各周波数帯域の設定済レベルH1lv,M1lv,L1lvとし、第2楽曲の各波長帯域の音量レベルを、第2楽曲の各周波数帯域の最小レベルH2min,M2min,L2minとする。これにより、第1楽曲全体の音量は、第1設定済音量V1stとなり、第2楽曲全体の音量は、第2最小音量V2minとなる。 When the operation mode is the assist mode and the fader operator 51 is arranged at the first end TC1, the volume adjustment section 65A adjusts the volume level of each wavelength band of the first music, as shown in FIG. Let the set levels of each frequency band of the first song be H1lv, M1lv, L1lv, and the volume level of each wavelength band of the second song be the minimum level of each frequency band of the second song H2min, M2min, L2min. As a result, the volume of the entire first music piece becomes the first set volume V1st, and the volume of the entire second music piece becomes the second minimum volume V2min.
 動作モードがアシストモードであり、かつ、フェーダー操作子51が第1範囲RC1に配置されている場合、音量調節部65Aは、第1楽曲の各波長帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルH1lv,M1lv,L1lvとし、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを最小レベルL2minとしたまま、フェーダー操作子51が+DC方向に操作されるに従って、第2楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルを増加させる。すなわち、第1範囲RC1において変化する音量レベルは、第2楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベル及び中周波帯域の音量レベルである。
 第1範囲RC1において、第2楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルは、第2楽曲の高周波帯域の最小レベルH2minから設定済レベルH2lvまでの範囲で変化される。
 第1範囲RC1において、第2楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルは、第2楽曲の中周波帯域の最小レベルM2minから設定済レベルM2lvまでの範囲で変化される。
When the operation mode is the assist mode and the fader operator 51 is arranged in the first range RC1, the volume adjustment section 65A sets the volume level of each wavelength band of the first music to the set levels H1lv, M1lv, L1lv, and while keeping the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song at the minimum level L2min, as the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction, the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the second song is adjusted. increase. That is, the volume level that changes in the first range RC1 is the volume level of the high frequency band and the volume level of the middle frequency band of the second music piece.
In the first range RC1, the volume level of the high frequency band of the second song is changed in the range from the minimum level H2min of the high frequency band of the second song to the preset level H2lv.
In the first range RC1, the volume level of the intermediate frequency band of the second song is changed in the range from the minimum level M2min of the intermediate frequency band of the second song to the preset level M2lv.
 フェーダー操作子51が第2位置PC2に配置されている場合、音量調節部65Aは、第1楽曲の各周波数帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルH1lv,M1lv,L1lvとし、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを最小レベルL2minとしたまま、第2楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルH2lvとし、第2楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルM2lvとする。 When the fader operator 51 is disposed at the second position PC2, the volume adjustment section 65A sets the volume level of each frequency band of the first music to the set levels H1lv, M1lv, L1lv, and sets the volume level of each frequency band of the first music to the low frequency band of the second music. While keeping the volume level of the second song at the minimum level L2min, the volume level of the high frequency band of the second song is set to a preset level H2lv, and the volume level of the middle frequency band of the second song is set to a preset level M2lv.
 動作モードがアシストモードであり、かつ、フェーダー操作子51が第2範囲RC2に配置されている場合、音量調節部65Aは、第1楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルH1lvとし、第1楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルM1lvとし、第2楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルH2lvとし、第2楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルM2lvとしたまま、フェーダー操作子51が+DC方向に操作されるに従って、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルL1lvから低下させるとともに、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを最小レベルL2minから増加させる。すなわち、第2範囲RC2において変化する音量レベルは、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベル及び第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルである。
 第2範囲RC2において、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルは、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の最小レベルL1minから設定済レベルL1lvまでの範囲で変化される。
 第2範囲RC2において、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルは、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の最小レベルL2minから設定済レベルL2lvまでの範囲で変化される。
When the operation mode is the assist mode and the fader operator 51 is arranged in the second range RC2, the volume adjustment section 65A sets the volume level of the high frequency band of the first music to the preset level H1lv, The volume level of the middle frequency band of the song is set to the set level M1lv, the volume level of the high frequency band of the second song is set to the set level H2lv, and the volume level of the middle frequency band of the second song is set to the set level M2lv, As the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction, the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song is decreased from the set level L1lv, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song is increased from the minimum level L2min. . That is, the volume level that changes in the second range RC2 is the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song and the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song.
In the second range RC2, the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song is changed in the range from the minimum level L1min of the low frequency band of the first song to the preset level L1lv.
In the second range RC2, the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song is changed in the range from the minimum level L2min of the low frequency band of the second song to the preset level L2lv.
 第1楽曲の低周波帯域の設定済レベルL1lvと第2楽曲の低周波帯域の設定済レベルL2lvとが同じで、かつ、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の最小レベルL1minと第2楽曲の低周波帯域の最小レベルL2minとが同じ場合、第2範囲RC2の中央の位置にフェーダー操作子51が配置されると、音量調節部65Aは、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルと第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルとを一致させる。
 このため、第2範囲RC2の中央位置に対してフェーダー操作子51が+DC方向に操作されるか、或いは、-DC方向に操作されるかによって、第1楽曲の低周波数帯域の音量レベルと第2楽曲の低周波数帯域の音量レベルとの大小関係が入れ替えられ、ひいては、各楽曲の低周波数帯域の音量の大小関係が入れ替えられる。すなわち、第2範囲RC2の中央位置に対してフェーダー操作子51が+DC方向に操作されると、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量が、第1楽曲の低周波数帯域の音量よりも大きくなる。一方、第2範囲RC2の中央位置に対してフェーダー操作子51が-DC方向に操作されると、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量が、第2楽曲の低周波数帯域の音量よりも大きくなる。
 なお、第2範囲RC2における中央の位置は、操作可能範囲RCにおける中央の位置と一致する。
The set level L1lv of the low frequency band of the first music and the set level L2lv of the low frequency band of the second music are the same, and the minimum level L1min of the low frequency band of the first music and the low frequency of the second music When the minimum band level L2min is the same, when the fader operator 51 is placed at the center position of the second range RC2, the volume adjustment section 65A adjusts the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song and the second song. Match the volume level of the low frequency band.
Therefore, depending on whether the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction or -DC direction with respect to the center position of the second range RC2, the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song and the The magnitude relationships between the volume levels of the low frequency bands of the two songs are swapped, and in turn, the magnitude relationships between the volume levels of the low frequency bands of each song are swapped. That is, when the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction with respect to the center position of the second range RC2, the volume of the low frequency band of the second song becomes larger than the volume of the low frequency band of the first song. On the other hand, when the fader operator 51 is operated in the -DC direction with respect to the center position of the second range RC2, the volume of the low frequency band of the first song becomes larger than the volume of the low frequency band of the second song. .
Note that the center position in the second range RC2 coincides with the center position in the operable range RC.
 本実施形態では、第2範囲RC2における第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベル変化率、及び、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベル変化率は一定である。このため、フェーダー操作子51が第2位置PC2から+DC方向に操作されるときに、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルは、一定の割合で低下し、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルは、一定の割合で増加する。また、フェーダー操作子51が第3位置PC3から-DC方向に操作されるときに、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルは、一定の割合で増加し、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルは、一定の割合で低下する。
 しかしながら、これに限らず、第2範囲RC2における第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベル変化率及び第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベル変化率は、一定でなくてもよい。例えば、第2範囲RC2にてフェーダー操作子51が+DC方向に操作されるとき、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルは、所定の曲線状に低下されてもよく、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルは、所定の曲線状に増加されてもよい。すなわち、各楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルの変化率は、フェーダー操作子51の操作に応じて変化してもよい。
In the present embodiment, the volume level change rate of the low frequency band of the first song and the volume level change rate of the low frequency band of the second song in the second range RC2 are constant. Therefore, when the fader operator 51 is operated from the second position PC2 in the +DC direction, the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song decreases at a constant rate, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song decreases at a constant rate. Levels increase at a constant rate. Furthermore, when the fader operator 51 is operated from the third position PC3 in the -DC direction, the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song increases at a constant rate, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song increases. The level decreases at a constant rate.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the volume level change rate of the low frequency band of the first song and the volume level change rate of the low frequency band of the second song in the second range RC2 may not be constant. For example, when the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction in the second range RC2, the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song may be lowered in a predetermined curve shape, and the low frequency band of the second song The volume level of the band may be increased in a predetermined curve. That is, the rate of change in the volume level of the low frequency band of each song may change according to the operation of the fader operator 51.
 フェーダー操作子51が第3位置PC3に配置されている場合、音量調節部65Aは、第1楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルH1lvとし、第1楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルM1lvとし、第2楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルH2lvとし、第2楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルM2lvとしたまま、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを最小レベルL1minとし、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルL2lvとする。 When the fader operator 51 is arranged at the third position PC3, the volume adjustment section 65A sets the volume level of the high frequency band of the first song to the set level H1lv, and sets the volume level of the middle frequency band of the first song. The volume level of the high frequency band of the second song is set to the set level H2lv, the volume level of the middle frequency band of the second song is set to the set level M2lv, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song is set to the set level M1lv. is set as the minimum level L1min, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the second music piece is set as the set level L2lv.
 動作モードがアシストモードであり、フェーダー操作子51が第3範囲RC3に配置されている場合、音量調節部65Aは、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを最小レベルL1minとし、第2楽曲の高周波帯域、中周波帯域及び低周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルを設定済レベルH2lv,M2lv,L2lvとしたまま、フェーダー操作子51が+DC方向に操作されるに従って、第1楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルH1lvから低下させるとともに、第1楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルM1lvから低下させる。すなわち、第3範囲RC3において変化する音量レベルは、第1楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベル及び中周波帯域の音量レベルである。
 第3範囲RC3において、第1楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルは、第1楽曲の高周波帯域の最小レベルH1minから設定済レベルH1lvまでの範囲で変化される。
 第3範囲RC3において、第1楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルは、第1楽曲の中周波帯域の最小レベルM1minから設定済レベルM1lvまでの範囲で変化される。
When the operation mode is the assist mode and the fader operator 51 is arranged in the third range RC3, the volume adjustment section 65A sets the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song to the minimum level L1min, and sets the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song to the minimum level L1min, With the volume levels of the high frequency band, medium frequency band, and low frequency band set at the preset levels H2lv, M2lv, and L2lv, as the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction, the volume level of the high frequency band of the first song increases. is lowered from the set level H1lv, and the volume level of the middle frequency band of the first song is lowered from the set level M1lv. That is, the volume level that changes in the third range RC3 is the volume level of the high frequency band and the volume level of the middle frequency band of the first song.
In the third range RC3, the volume level of the high frequency band of the first song is changed in the range from the minimum level H1min of the high frequency band of the first song to the preset level H1lv.
In the third range RC3, the volume level of the intermediate frequency band of the first song is changed in a range from the minimum level M1min of the intermediate frequency band of the first song to the preset level M1lv.
 フェーダー操作子51が第4位置PC4に配置された場合、すなわち、フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2に配置された場合には、音量調節部65Aは、第1楽曲の高周波帯域、中周波帯域及び低周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルを最小レベルH1min,M1min,L1minとし、第2楽曲の高周波帯域、中周波帯域及び低周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルを設定済レベルH2lv,M2lv,L2lvとする。これにより、第1楽曲全体の音量は、第1最小音量V1minとなり、第2楽曲全体の音量は、第2設定済音量V2stとなり、第1楽曲から第2楽曲へのミキシングが完了する。 When the fader operator 51 is placed at the fourth position PC4, that is, when the fader operator 51 is placed at the second end TC2, the volume adjustment section 65A adjusts the high frequency band and medium frequency of the first song. The respective volume levels of the band and low frequency band are set to minimum levels H1min, M1min, and L1min, and the respective volume levels of the high frequency band, medium frequency band, and low frequency band of the second song are set levels H2lv, M2lv, L2lv. . As a result, the volume of the entire first song becomes the first minimum volume V1min, the volume of the entire second song becomes the second set volume V2st, and the mixing from the first song to the second song is completed.
 [最小レベルの設定]
 上記説明では、各波長帯域の最小レベルH1min,M1min,L1min,H2min,M2min,L2minを便宜上0とした。しかしながら、これに限らず、最小レベルH1min,M1min,L1min,H2min,M2min,L2minのうち少なくとも1つの最小レベルは0でなくてもよい。
 例えば、最小レベルH1min,M1min,L1min,H2min,M2min,L2minは、設定済レベルH1lv,M1lv,L1lv,H2lv,M2lv,L2lvの値に応じて設定されてもよい。
 より詳しい例では、第1楽曲の高周波帯域の設定済レベルH1lvが0以上、0.5以下である場合には、最小レベルH1minを0とし、設定済レベルH1lvが0.5を越え、1以下である場合には、最小レベルH1minを設定済レベルH1lvから0.5を減算した値としてもよい。設定済レベルM1lv,L1lv,H2lv,M2lv,L2lvが0以上、0.5未満である場合も同様に最小レベルM1min,L1min,H2min,M2min,L2minが設定される。
[Minimum level setting]
In the above description, the minimum levels H1min, M1min, L1min, H2min, M2min, and L2min of each wavelength band are set to 0 for convenience. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the minimum levels H1min, M1min, L1min, H2min, M2min, and L2min may not be 0.
For example, the minimum levels H1min, M1min, L1min, H2min, M2min, and L2min may be set according to the values of the set levels H1lv, M1lv, L1lv, H2lv, M2lv, and L2lv.
In a more detailed example, if the set level H1lv of the high frequency band of the first song is 0 or more and 0.5 or less, the minimum level H1min is set to 0, and the set level H1lv exceeds 0.5 and is 1 or less. In this case, the minimum level H1min may be a value obtained by subtracting 0.5 from the set level H1lv. When the set levels M1lv, L1lv, H2lv, M2lv, L2lv are 0 or more and less than 0.5, the minimum levels M1min, L1min, H2min, M2min, L2min are similarly set.
 図11は、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の設定済レベルL1lvが0.6であり、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の設定済レベルL2lvが0.5である場合の第1楽曲の各周波数帯域の音量レベルの変化と第2楽曲の各周波数帯域の音量レベルの変化とを示す図である。
 例えば、低周波帯域調節部324によって第1楽曲の低周波帯域の設定済レベルL1lvが0.6に設定されている場合には、図11に示すように、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の最小レベルを0.1としてもよい。
 このような場合でも、フェーダー操作子51を操作することによって、第1楽曲の音量と第2楽曲の音量とを入れ替えることができる。特に第2範囲RC2にてフェーダー操作子51を操作することによって、各楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域の音量に関係なく、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量と第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量とを入れ替えることができる。
 なお、設定済レベルと最小レベルとの差分は0.5に限らず、適宜変更可能である。
FIG. 11 shows each frequency band of the first music when the set level L1lv of the low frequency band of the first music is 0.6 and the set level L2lv of the low frequency band of the second music is 0.5. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing changes in the volume level of the second song and changes in the volume level of each frequency band of the second song.
For example, when the low frequency band adjustment section 324 sets the preset level L1lv of the low frequency band of the first song to 0.6, as shown in FIG. The level may be set to 0.1.
Even in such a case, by operating the fader operator 51, the volume of the first music piece and the volume of the second music piece can be switched. In particular, by operating the fader operator 51 in the second range RC2, the volume of the low frequency band of the first song and the low frequency band of the second song can be adjusted regardless of the volume of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of each song. You can change the volume.
Note that the difference between the set level and the minimum level is not limited to 0.5, and can be changed as appropriate.
 図12は、アシストモードでの第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMの変化の他の一例を示す図である。具体的に、図13は、第1楽曲のBPMが100であり、第2楽曲のBPMが120であるときに、アシストモードにてクロスフェーダー5を操作した場合の各楽曲の再生時BPMの変化の他の一例を示す図である。なお、図12に示すグラフにおける横軸には、上記したフェーダー操作子51の相対位置を示す数値が設定されている。
 BPM設定部66は、第1実施形態にて説明したように、フェーダー操作子51の操作に応じて、各楽曲の再生時BPMを操作可能範囲RCの全範囲で同じように変化させる。しかしながら、これに限らず、例えば図12に示すように、BPM設定部66は、フェーダー操作子51が第1範囲RC1及び第3範囲RC3に配置されているときに、フェーダー操作子51の位置に応じて、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMを調節してもよい。
FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating another example of a change in BPM during playback of each of the first music piece and the second music piece in the assist mode. Specifically, FIG. 13 shows the change in BPM during playback of each song when the crossfader 5 is operated in assist mode when the BPM of the first song is 100 and the BPM of the second song is 120. It is a figure which shows another example. Note that on the horizontal axis of the graph shown in FIG. 12, a numerical value indicating the relative position of the fader operator 51 described above is set.
As described in the first embodiment, the BPM setting unit 66 changes the BPM of each song during playback in the same way throughout the operable range RC in accordance with the operation of the fader operator 51. However, the present invention is not limited thereto; for example, as shown in FIG. Accordingly, the BPM during playback of each of the first music piece and the second music piece may be adjusted.
 この場合、フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1(第1位置PC1)に配置されている場合、BPM設定部66は、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMを、第1楽曲のBPMとする。図12の例では、各楽曲の再生時BPMは、第1楽曲のBPMである100に設定される。
 フェーダー操作子51が第1範囲RC1に配置されている場合、BPM設定部66は、第1楽曲のBPMと、第1楽曲のBPM及び第2楽曲のBPMの中間値との間の範囲において、フェーダー操作子51の位置に応じて、各楽曲の再生時BPMを設定する。図12の例では、第1楽曲のBPMが100であり、第1楽曲のBPMと第2楽曲のBPMとの中間値が110であるので、フェーダー操作子51が第1範囲RC1に配置されている場合には、各楽曲の再生時BPMは、100より大きく、110未満の間の値に設定される。
In this case, when the fader operator 51 is arranged at the first end TC1 (first position PC1), the BPM setting section 66 sets the BPM of the first music and the second music at the time of playback of each of the first music and the second music. The BPM of In the example of FIG. 12, the playback BPM of each song is set to 100, which is the BPM of the first song.
When the fader operator 51 is arranged in the first range RC1, the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM in the range between the BPM of the first song and the intermediate value between the BPM of the first song and the BPM of the second song. Depending on the position of the fader operator 51, the BPM of each piece of music is set. In the example of FIG. 12, the BPM of the first song is 100, and the intermediate value between the BPM of the first song and the BPM of the second song is 110, so the fader operator 51 is arranged in the first range RC1. If so, the BPM during playback of each song is set to a value greater than 100 and less than 110.
 フェーダー操作子51が第2位置PC2、第2範囲RC2及び第3位置PC3に配置されている場合、BPM設定部66は、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMを、上記中間値に設定する。図12の例では、各楽曲の再生時BPMは110に設定される。
 フェーダー操作子51が第3範囲RC3に配置されている場合、BPM設定部66は、上記中間値と第2楽曲のBPMとの間の範囲において、フェーダー操作子51の位置に応じて第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMを設定する。図12の例では、第2楽曲のBPMは120であるので、各楽曲の再生時BPMは、110より大きく、120未満の間の値に設定される。
When the fader operator 51 is arranged at the second position PC2, the second range RC2, and the third position PC3, the BPM setting section 66 sets the BPM during playback of each of the first music piece and the second music piece to the above-mentioned intermediate value. Set to . In the example of FIG. 12, the BPM during playback of each song is set to 110.
When the fader operator 51 is arranged in the third range RC3, the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM of the first song according to the position of the fader operator 51 in the range between the above-mentioned intermediate value and the BPM of the second song. and the BPM at the time of reproduction of each of the second songs. In the example of FIG. 12, the BPM of the second song is 120, so the BPM of each song during playback is set to a value greater than 110 and less than 120.
 フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2(第4位置PC4)に配置されている場合、BPM設定部66は、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMを、第2楽曲のBPMとする。図12の例では、各楽曲の再生時BPMは、120に設定される。
 なお、第1範囲RC1及び第3範囲RC3における再生時BPMの変化率は、図12の例では一定であるが、一定でなくてもよい。例えば当該変化率は、フェーダー操作子51が±DC方向に操作されるに従って変化してもよい。
 このように各楽曲の再生時BPMが変化する場合には、音量調節部65によるフェーダー操作子51の操作に応じた高周波帯域及び中周波帯域の音量レベル調節に合わせて、BPM設定部66による各楽曲の再生時BPMの調節を実行できる。従って、違和感なく各楽曲を自然にミックスできる。
When the fader operator 51 is arranged at the second end TC2 (fourth position PC4), the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM of each of the first music and the second music at the time of playback to the BPM of the second music. do. In the example of FIG. 12, the BPM during playback of each song is set to 120.
Note that although the rate of change in BPM during reproduction in the first range RC1 and the third range RC3 is constant in the example of FIG. 12, it does not have to be constant. For example, the rate of change may change as the fader operator 51 is operated in the ±DC direction.
In this way, when the BPM changes during playback of each song, the BPM setting section 66 adjusts the volume level of the high frequency band and medium frequency band according to the operation of the fader operator 51 by the volume adjustment section 65. You can adjust the BPM when playing music. Therefore, each song can be mixed naturally without any discomfort.
 [アシストモードにてチャンネルフェーダーを操作した場合の音量調節]
 以下、音響制御装置の動作モードがアシストモードであり、各チャンネルフェーダー33A,33Bの操作子33A1,33B1を操作した場合における音量調節部65Aによる各楽曲の音量調節を説明する。なお、アシストモードにおいて各操作子33A1,33B1を操作した場合の各楽曲のBPM設定部66による再生時BPMの設定内容は、第1実施形態にて説明したBPM設定部66による各楽曲の再生時BPMの設定内容と同様である。
 音響制御装置の動作モードがアシストモードである場合、音量調節部65Aは、操作可能範囲RAにおいて第1操作子33A1が位置する範囲に応じて、第1楽曲の各周波帯域の音量を調節する。また、音響制御装置1の動作モードがアシストモードである場合、音量調節部65は、操作可能範囲RBにおいて第2操作子33B1が位置する範囲に応じて、第2楽曲の各周波帯域の音量を調節する。
[Volume adjustment when operating the channel fader in assist mode]
Hereinafter, the volume adjustment of each song by the volume adjustment section 65A when the operation mode of the audio control device is the assist mode and the operators 33A1 and 33B1 of the respective channel faders 33A and 33B are operated will be described. Note that the content of the BPM settings at the time of playback by the BPM setting unit 66 of each song when operating each of the operators 33A1 and 33B1 in the assist mode is the same as that at the time of playback of each song by the BPM setting unit 66 described in the first embodiment. The settings are the same as those for BPM.
When the operation mode of the acoustic control device is the assist mode, the volume adjustment section 65A adjusts the volume of each frequency band of the first music according to the range in which the first operator 33A1 is located in the operable range RA. Further, when the operation mode of the sound control device 1 is the assist mode, the volume adjustment section 65 adjusts the volume of each frequency band of the second music according to the range in which the second operator 33B1 is located in the operable range RB. Adjust.
 図13は、アシストモードで各チャンネルフェーダー33A,33Bを操作した場合の第1楽曲の高周波数帯域の音量レベル及び中周波帯域の音量レベルの変化、並びに、第2楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベル及び中周波帯域の音量レベルの変化を示す図である。
 音響制御装置1の動作モードがアシストモードである場合、音量調節部65Aは、操作可能範囲RAにおいて第1操作子33A1が位置する範囲に応じて、第1楽曲の各周波帯域の音量レベルを調節して、第1楽曲の音量を調節する。また、音響制御装置1の動作モードがアシストモードである場合、音量調節部65Aは、操作可能範囲RBにおいて第2操作子33B1が位置する範囲に応じて、第2楽曲の各周波帯域の音量レベルを調節して、第2楽曲の音量を調節する。
 図13に示すように、第1操作子33A1の操作可能範囲RAにおいて第1端部TA1と第2端部TA2との間の所定位置を位置PA1とする。位置PA1は、第2端部TA2から操作可能範囲RAの1/3の位置とすることができる。第1端部TA1から位置PA1までの範囲を第1範囲RA1とし、位置PA1から第2端部TA2までの範囲を第2範囲RA2とする。
 また、第2操作子33B1の操作可能範囲RBにおいて第1端部TB1と第2端部TB2との間の所定位置を位置PB1とする。位置PB1は、第2端部TB2から操作可能範囲RBの1/3の位置とすることができる。第1端部TB1から位置PB1までの範囲を第1範囲RB1とし、位置PB1から第2端部TB2までの範囲を第2範囲RB2とする。
FIG. 13 shows changes in the volume level of the high frequency band and the volume level of the medium frequency band of the first song when operating each channel fader 33A, 33B in assist mode, and the volume level and volume level of the high frequency band of the second song. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing changes in volume level in a medium frequency band.
When the operation mode of the sound control device 1 is the assist mode, the volume adjustment unit 65A adjusts the volume level of each frequency band of the first music according to the range in which the first operator 33A1 is located in the operable range RA. to adjust the volume of the first song. Further, when the operation mode of the sound control device 1 is the assist mode, the volume adjustment unit 65A adjusts the volume level of each frequency band of the second music according to the range in which the second operator 33B1 is located in the operable range RB. to adjust the volume of the second song.
As shown in FIG. 13, a predetermined position between the first end TA1 and the second end TA2 in the operable range RA of the first operator 33A1 is defined as a position PA1. The position PA1 can be set at ⅓ of the operable range RA from the second end TA2. The range from the first end TA1 to the position PA1 is defined as a first range RA1, and the range from the position PA1 to the second end TA2 is defined as a second range RA2.
Further, in the operable range RB of the second operator 33B1, a predetermined position between the first end TB1 and the second end TB2 is defined as a position PB1. The position PB1 can be set to ⅓ of the operable range RB from the second end TB2. The range from the first end TB1 to the position PB1 is defined as a first range RB1, and the range from the position PB1 to the second end TB2 is defined as a second range RB2.
 [チャンネルフェーダーの第1範囲での音量調節]
 音量調節部65Aは、図13に示すように、第1範囲RA1における第1操作子33A1の位置に応じて、第1楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルを調節し、第1範囲RB1における第2操作子33B1の位置に応じて、第2楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルを調節する。
 なお、第1設定済音量V1stは、第1操作子33A1の位置に基づいて予め設定されるものとし、第2設定済音量V2stは、第2操作子33B1の位置に基づいて予め設定されるものとする。例えば、第1設定済音量V1stは、モード切替スイッチ4が押下されて、モード切替部64によって動作モードがアシストモードに切り替わった時の第1操作子33A1の位置に応じた音量とすることができる。第2設定済音量V2stは、モード切替スイッチ4が押下されて、モード切替部64によって動作モードがアシストモードに切り替わった時の第2操作子33B1の位置に応じた音量とすることができる。しかしながら、これに限らず、第1設定済音量V1stは、他の方法又は他の操作子によって予め設定されてもよい。第2設定済音量V2stも同様である。
[Volume adjustment in the first range of the channel fader]
As shown in FIG. 13, the volume adjustment unit 65A adjusts the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the first music according to the position of the first operator 33A1 in the first range RA1, and Depending on the position of the second operator 33B1 in the range RB1, the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the second music is adjusted.
Note that the first set volume V1st is set in advance based on the position of the first controller 33A1, and the second set volume V2st is set in advance based on the position of the second controller 33B1. shall be. For example, the first set volume V1st can be set to a volume corresponding to the position of the first operator 33A1 when the mode changeover switch 4 is pressed and the mode changeover section 64 switches the operation mode to the assist mode. . The second set volume V2st can be set to a volume corresponding to the position of the second operator 33B1 when the mode changeover switch 4 is pressed and the mode changeover section 64 switches the operation mode to the assist mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first set volume V1st may be set in advance by other methods or other operators. The same applies to the second set volume V2st.
 アシストモードにおいて第1操作子33A1が第1端部TA1に配置されると、音量調節部65Aは、第1楽曲の高周波帯域、中周波帯域及び低周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルを最小レベルH1min,M1min,L1minに設定して、第1楽曲全体の音量を第1最小音量V1minとする。
 第1操作子33A1が第1範囲RA1に配置されている場合、第1操作子33A1が操作されると、音量調節部65Aは、図13では図示を省略するが、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを最小レベルL1minとしたまま、図13に示すように、第1操作子33A1の位置に応じて、最小レベルH1minから設定済レベルH1lvまでの間で第1楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルを調節するとともに、最小レベルM1minから設定済レベルM1lvまでの間で第1楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルを調節する。すなわち、音量調節部65Aは、第1範囲RA1において第1操作子33A1が+DA方向に操作されると、第1楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルを増加させ、-DA方向に操作されると、第1楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルを低下させる。これにより、第1楽曲全体の音量が変化する。なお、図13の例では、第1楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルの変化率は、一定であるが、一定でなくてもよい。例えば各変化率は、第1操作子33A1の±DA方向への操作とともに変化してもよい。
When the first operator 33A1 is placed at the first end TA1 in the assist mode, the volume adjustment section 65A sets the volume level of each of the high frequency band, medium frequency band, and low frequency band of the first music to the minimum level H1min, M1min and L1min are set, and the volume of the entire first music piece is set to the first minimum volume V1min.
When the first operator 33A1 is arranged in the first range RA1, when the first operator 33A1 is operated, the volume adjustment section 65A adjusts the low frequency band of the first music, although not shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the volume level of the high frequency band of the first song is changed between the minimum level H1min and the preset level H1lv according to the position of the first controller 33A1, while keeping the volume level of the first music piece at the minimum level L1min. At the same time, the volume level of the middle frequency band of the first music piece is adjusted between the minimum level M1min and the preset level M1lv. That is, when the first operator 33A1 is operated in the +DA direction in the first range RA1, the volume adjustment section 65A increases the volume level of each of the high frequency band and the medium frequency band of the first song, and increases the volume level in the -DA direction. When operated, the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the first song is reduced. As a result, the volume of the entire first song changes. Note that in the example of FIG. 13, the rate of change in the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the first song is constant, but it does not have to be constant. For example, each rate of change may change as the first operator 33A1 is operated in the ±DA direction.
 第1操作子33A1が位置PA1に配置されると、音量調節部65は、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを最小レベルL1minとしたまま、第1楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルH1lvとし、第1楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルM1lvとする。
 このように、第1範囲RA1に第1操作子33A1が配置されているときの第1楽曲の音量変化は、フェーダー操作子51が第3範囲RC3に配置されているときの第1楽曲の音量変化と同じである。
When the first controller 33A1 is placed at the position PA1, the volume adjustment unit 65 sets the volume level of the high frequency band of the first music while keeping the volume level of the low frequency band of the first music at the minimum level L1min. The level is set to H1lv, and the volume level of the middle frequency band of the first song is set to the set level M1lv.
In this way, the volume change of the first music piece when the first controller 33A1 is placed in the first range RA1 is the same as the volume change of the first music piece when the fader operator 51 is placed in the third range RC3. Same as change.
 アシストモードにおいて第2操作子33B1が第1端部TB1に配置されると、音量調節部65Aは、第2楽曲の高周波帯域、中周波帯域及び低周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルを最小レベルH2min,M2min,L2minに設定して、第2楽曲全体の音量を第2最小音量V2minとする。
 第2操作子33B1が第1範囲RB1に配置されている場合、第2操作子33B1が操作されると、音量調節部65Aは、図13では図示を省略するが、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを最小レベルL2minとしたまま、図13に示すように、第2操作子33B1の位置に応じて、最小レベルH2minから設定済レベルH2lvまでの間で第2楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルを調節するとともに、最小レベルM2minから設定済レベルM2lvまでの間で第2楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルを調節する。すなわち、音量調節部65Aは、第1範囲RB1において第2操作子33B1が+DB方向に操作されると、第2楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルを増加させ、-DB方向に操作されると、第2楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルを低下させる。これにより、第1楽曲全体の音量が変化する。なお、図13の例では、第2楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルの変化率は、一定であるが、一定でなくてもよい。例えば各変化率は、第2操作子33B1の±DB方向への操作とともに変化してもよい。
When the second operator 33B1 is placed at the first end TB1 in the assist mode, the volume adjustment unit 65A sets the volume level of each of the high frequency band, medium frequency band, and low frequency band of the second music to the minimum level H2min, M2min and L2min are set, and the volume of the entire second music piece is set to the second minimum volume V2min.
When the second operator 33B1 is arranged in the first range RB1, when the second operator 33B1 is operated, the volume adjustment section 65A adjusts the low frequency band of the second music, although not shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the volume level of the high frequency band of the second song is changed from the minimum level H2min to the preset level H2lv depending on the position of the second controller 33B1, while keeping the volume level of the second music set at the minimum level L2min. At the same time, the volume level of the middle frequency band of the second music piece is adjusted between the minimum level M2min and the preset level M2lv. That is, when the second operator 33B1 is operated in the +DB direction in the first range RB1, the volume adjustment section 65A increases the volume level of each of the high frequency band and the medium frequency band of the second song, and increases the volume level in the -DB direction. When operated, the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the second music is reduced. As a result, the volume of the entire first song changes. Note that in the example of FIG. 13, the rate of change in the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the second song is constant, but it does not have to be constant. For example, each rate of change may change as the second operator 33B1 is operated in the ±DB direction.
 第2操作子33B1が位置PB1に配置されると、音量調節部65は、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを最小レベルL2minとしたまま、第2楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルH2lvとし、第2楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルM2lvとする。
 このように、第1範囲RB1に第2操作子33B1が配置されているときの第2楽曲の音量変化は、フェーダー操作子51が第1範囲RC1に配置されているときの第2楽曲の音量変化と同じである。
When the second controller 33B1 is placed at position PB1, the volume adjustment unit 65 sets the volume level of the high frequency band of the second music while keeping the volume level of the low frequency band of the second music at the minimum level L2min. The level is set to H2lv, and the volume level of the middle frequency band of the second song is set to the set level M2lv.
In this way, the volume change of the second music piece when the second controller 33B1 is placed in the first range RB1 is the same as the volume change of the second music piece when the fader operator 51 is placed in the first range RC1. Same as change.
 [チャンネルフェーダーの第2範囲での音量調節]
 音量調節部65Aは、第2範囲RA2における第1操作子33A1の位置及び第2範囲RB2における第2操作子33B1の位置に応じて、最小レベルL1minから設定済レベルL1lvまでの間で第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを調節するとともに、最小レベルL2minから設定済レベルL2lvまでの間で第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを調節する。
[Volume adjustment in the second range of the channel fader]
The volume adjustment unit 65A adjusts the first music from the minimum level L1min to the preset level L1lv according to the position of the first operator 33A1 in the second range RA2 and the position of the second operator 33B1 in the second range RB2. The volume level of the low frequency band of the second song is adjusted between the minimum level L2min and the preset level L2lv.
 具体的に、音量調節部65Aは、第1操作子33A1が第2範囲RA2に配置され、第2操作子33B1が第2範囲RB2に配置された場合、位置取得部63によって取得された第1操作子33A1の位置を示す数値及び第2操作子33B1の位置を示す数値を変換する。詳述すると、音量調節部65Aは、取得された第1操作子33A1の位置を示す数値を、位置PA1に第1操作子33A1が位置する場合に0となり、第2端部TA2に第1操作子33A1が位置する場合に1となる数値に変換する。同様に、音量調節部65Aは、取得された第2操作子33B1の位置を示す数値を、位置PB1に第2操作子33B1が位置する場合に0となり、第2端部TB2に第2操作子33B1が位置する場合に1となる数値に変換する。
 次に、音量調節部65Aは、変換した第1操作子33A1の位置を示す数値を、変換した第2操作子33B1の位置を示す数値によって除算し、除算結果の数値を取得する。
 この後、音量調節部65Aは、除算結果の数値に対応する第1楽曲の音量レベル及び第2楽曲の音量レベルを取得する。
Specifically, when the first operator 33A1 is placed in the second range RA2 and the second operator 33B1 is placed in the second range RB2, the volume adjustment unit 65A controls the first The numerical value indicating the position of the operator 33A1 and the numerical value indicating the position of the second operator 33B1 are converted. To be more specific, the volume adjustment unit 65A sets the acquired numerical value indicating the position of the first operator 33A1 to 0 when the first operator 33A1 is located at the position PA1, and sets the value to 0 when the first operator 33A1 is located at the position PA1, and sets the value indicating the position of the first operator 33A1 to 0 at the second end TA2. It is converted into a numerical value that becomes 1 when the child 33A1 is located. Similarly, the volume adjustment unit 65A sets the obtained numerical value indicating the position of the second operator 33B1 to 0 when the second operator 33B1 is located at the position PB1, and sets the value to 0 when the second operator 33B1 is located at the position PB1, and sets the value to 0 when the second operator 33B1 is located at the position PB1, Convert to a numerical value that becomes 1 when 33B1 is located.
Next, the volume control unit 65A divides the converted numerical value indicating the position of the first operator 33A1 by the converted numerical value indicating the position of the second operator 33B1, and obtains the numerical value of the division result.
Thereafter, the volume adjustment unit 65A obtains the volume level of the first music piece and the volume level of the second music piece that correspond to the numerical value of the division result.
 図14は、アシストモードで第1操作子33A1及び第2操作子33B1を操作した場合の第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの低周波帯域の音量レベルの変化の一例を示す図である。換言すると、図14は、図示しない記憶部に記憶されたレベル変化情報の内容を説明する図である。
 ここで、図示しない記憶部は、図14に示したグラフを予め記憶している。すなわち、記憶部は、除算結果の数値に対応する各楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを示すレベル変化情報を記憶している。詳述すると、記憶部は、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを示すレベル変化情報として、除算結果の数値が小さくなるに従って最小レベルL1minに近づき、除算結果の数値が大きくなるに従って設定済レベルL1lvに近づく関数を記憶している。また、記憶部は、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを示すレベル変化情報として、除算結果の数値が小さくなるに従って設定済レベルL2lvに近づき、除算結果の数値が大きくなるに従って最小レベルL2minに近づく関数を記憶している。なお、レベル変化情報として記憶部が記憶する関数は、図14に示すような一次関数でもよく、二次関数等の高次関数であってもよい。
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a change in the volume level of the low frequency band of each of the first music piece and the second music piece when the first operator 33A1 and the second operator 33B1 are operated in the assist mode. In other words, FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating the contents of level change information stored in a storage section (not shown).
Here, the storage unit (not shown) stores the graph shown in FIG. 14 in advance. That is, the storage unit stores level change information indicating the volume level of the low frequency band of each song corresponding to the numerical value of the division result. To be more specific, the storage unit stores, as level change information indicating the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song, the smaller the numerical value of the division result approaches the minimum level L1min, and the larger the numerical value of the division result, the preset level. A function that approaches L1lv is memorized. The storage unit also stores, as level change information indicating the volume level of the low frequency band of the second music, the smaller the numerical value of the division result, the closer to the set level L2lv, and the larger the numerical value of the division result, the lower the set level L2min. It remembers the function it approaches. Note that the function stored in the storage unit as the level change information may be a linear function as shown in FIG. 14, or may be a high-order function such as a quadratic function.
 このようなレベル変化情報に基づいて、音量調節部65Aは、各楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを取得し、取得した音量レベルに、各楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを設定する。
 なお、第2範囲RA2,RB2に各操作子33A1,33B1が配置されている場合、第1楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルは設定済レベルH1lv,M1lvであり、第2楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルは設定済レベルH2lv,M2lvである。
 このように、第2範囲RA2に第1操作子33A1が配置され、第2範囲RB2に第2操作子33B1が配置されているときの各楽曲の音量変化は、フェーダー操作子51が第2範囲RC2に配置されているときの各楽曲の音量変化と同じである。
Based on such level change information, the volume adjustment unit 65A acquires the volume level of the low frequency band of each song, and sets the volume level of the low frequency band of each song to the acquired volume level.
Note that when the respective operators 33A1 and 33B1 are arranged in the second ranges RA2 and RB2, the respective volume levels of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the first music are set levels H1lv and M1lv, The respective volume levels of the high frequency band and medium frequency band are set levels H2lv and M2lv.
In this way, when the first operator 33A1 is arranged in the second range RA2 and the second operator 33B1 is arranged in the second range RB2, the volume change of each song is as follows: This is the same as the change in volume of each song when placed in RC2.
 [出力楽曲における第1楽曲と第2楽曲との入れ替え]
 音響制御装置1の動作モードがアシストモードである場合、音量調節部65Aが上記のように第1楽曲及び第2楽曲の各周波数帯域の音量レベルを調節する。このことから、各操作子33A1,33B1を以下のように操作することによって、フェーダー操作子51を操作した場合と同様に、第1楽曲の各周波数帯域の音量と第2楽曲の各周波数帯域の音量とを入れ替えることができる。
[Replacement of the first song and the second song in the output song]
When the operation mode of the sound control device 1 is the assist mode, the volume adjustment section 65A adjusts the volume level of each frequency band of the first music and the second music as described above. From this, by operating each of the operators 33A1 and 33B1 as follows, the volume of each frequency band of the first song and the volume of each frequency band of the second song can be adjusted in the same way as when operating the fader operator 51. You can change the volume.
 例えば第1操作子33A1が第2端部TA2に配置され、第2操作子33B1が第1端部TB1に配置されているとする。この場合、第1楽曲全体の音量は第1設定済音量V1stであり、第2楽曲全体の音量は第2最小音量V2minである。
 この状態から、第2操作子33B1のみを+DB方向に操作すると、図13右側に図示した第2楽曲の高周波数帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルのグラフに示すように、第2操作子33B1が第1範囲RB1に位置する間、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルが最小レベルL2minのまま、第2楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルが増加する。そして、第2操作子33B1が位置PB1に到達したときに、第2楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルは設定済レベルH2lvとなり、第2楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルは設定済レベルM2lvとなる。このように、第1範囲RC1にてフェーダー操作子51を操作した場合と同様に、第2楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量を調節できる。
For example, assume that the first operator 33A1 is arranged at the second end TA2, and the second operator 33B1 is arranged at the first end TB1. In this case, the volume of the entire first song is the first set volume V1st, and the volume of the entire second song is the second minimum volume V2min.
From this state, when only the second controller 33B1 is operated in the +DB direction, the second controller While 33B1 is located in the first range RB1, the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song remains at the minimum level L2min, and the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the second song increases. Then, when the second operator 33B1 reaches position PB1, the volume level of the high frequency band of the second music becomes the set level H2lv, and the volume level of the middle frequency band of the second music becomes the set level M2lv. In this way, similarly to the case where the fader operator 51 is operated in the first range RC1, the volume of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the second music piece can be adjusted.
 第2操作子33B1のみを位置PB1から+DB方向に操作すると、第2楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルが設定済レベルH2lvのままであり、第2楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルが設定済レベルM2lvのまま、図14に示すように、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルが最小レベルL2minから増加するとともに、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルが設定済レベルL1lvから低下する。これに伴い、第1楽曲全体の音量は、第1設定済音量V1stから低下する。
 そして、第2操作子33B1が第2端部TB2に到達すると、第1操作子33A1も第2端部TA2に配置されていることから、図14に示すように、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルと第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルとは、ともに等しくなる。
 この後、第1操作子33A1のみを第2端部TA2から-DA方向に操作すると、第1楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルが設定済レベルH1lvのままであり、第1楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルが設定済レベルM1lvのまま、図14に示すように、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルは低下し、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルは増加する。
 そして、第1操作子33A1が位置PA1に到達すると、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルは、最小レベルL1minとなるとともに、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルは、設定済レベルL2lvとなる。これに伴い、第2楽曲全体の音量は、第2設定済音量V2stとなる。すなわち、第2楽曲全体の音量が第2設定済音量V2stとなるための条件は、第2操作子33B1が第2端部TB2に配置され、かつ、第1操作子33A1が位置PA、第1範囲RA1又は第1端部TA1に配置されていることである。なお、第1楽曲全体の音量が第1設定済音量V1stとなるための条件も同様である。
When only the second controller 33B1 is operated from position PB1 in the +DB direction, the volume level of the high frequency band of the second song remains at the set level H2lv, and the volume level of the middle frequency band of the second song remains the set level M2lv. As shown in FIG. 14, the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song increases from the minimum level L2min, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song decreases from the preset level L1lv. Accordingly, the volume of the entire first song decreases from the first set volume V1st.
Then, when the second operator 33B1 reaches the second end TB2, since the first operator 33A1 is also arranged at the second end TA2, as shown in FIG. The volume level of the first music piece and the volume level of the low frequency band of the first music piece are both equal to each other.
After this, when only the first controller 33A1 is operated from the second end TA2 in the -DA direction, the volume level of the high frequency band of the first song remains at the set level H1lv, and the volume level of the middle frequency band of the first song remains the same. While the volume level remains at the set level M1lv, as shown in FIG. 14, the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song decreases, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song increases.
Then, when the first controller 33A1 reaches position PA1, the volume level of the low frequency band of the first music becomes the minimum level L1min, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the second music reaches the preset level L2lv. Become. Accordingly, the volume of the entire second music piece becomes the second set volume V2st. That is, the conditions for the volume of the entire second music to be the second preset volume V2st are that the second controller 33B1 is located at the second end TB2, and the first controller 33A1 is located at the position PA and the first It is arranged in range RA1 or first end TA1. Note that the conditions for the volume of the entire first music piece to be the first set volume V1st are also the same.
 第2操作子33B1が第2端部TB2に配置されたまま、第1操作子33A1を位置PA1から-DA方向に操作すると、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルが最小レベルL1minとされたまま、図13左側に図示した第1楽曲の高周波数帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルのグラフに示すように、第1楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルが低下する。
 第1操作子33A1が第1端部TA1に到達すると、第1楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルが最小レベルH1minとなり、第2楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルが最小レベルM1minとなって、第1楽曲全体の音量が第1最小音量V1minとなる。このように、第3範囲RC3にてフェーダー操作子51を操作した場合と同様に、第1楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルを調節できる。
When the first operator 33A1 is operated in the -DA direction from the position PA1 while the second operator 33B1 is placed at the second end TB2, the volume level of the low frequency band of the first music is set to the minimum level L1min. As shown in the graph of the volume levels of the high frequency band and the medium frequency band of the first music piece shown on the left side of FIG. 13, the volume level of the high frequency band and the medium frequency band of the first music piece decreases.
When the first controller 33A1 reaches the first end TA1, the volume level of the high frequency band of the first song becomes the minimum level H1min, the volume level of the middle frequency band of the second song becomes the minimum level M1min, and the first The volume of the entire music becomes the first minimum volume V1min. In this way, similarly to the case where the fader operator 51 is operated in the third range RC3, the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the first music piece can be adjusted.
 以上のように、第2範囲RB2にて第2操作子33B1を操作し、第2範囲RA2にて第1操作子33A1を操作することによって、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを低下させ、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを増加させることができる。すなわち、第1楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルH1lv,M1lvとし、第2楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域の音量レベルを設定済レベルH2lv,M2lvとした状態にて、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの低周波帯域の音量レベルを増減させて、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの低周波帯域の音量を入れ替えることができる。 As described above, by operating the second controller 33B1 in the second range RB2 and operating the first controller 33A1 in the second range RA2, the volume level of the low frequency band of the first music piece is lowered. , the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song can be increased. That is, in a state where the volume levels of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the first song are set to preset levels H1lv and M1lv, and the volume levels of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the second song are set to preset levels H2lv and M2lv, By increasing or decreasing the volume levels of the low frequency bands of the first music piece and the second music piece, it is possible to replace the volume levels of the low frequency bands of the first music piece and the second music piece.
 [第2実施形態の効果]
 以上説明した本実施形態に係る音響制御装置は、上記した第1実施形態に係る音響制御装置1と同様の効果を奏することができる他、以下の効果を奏することができる。
 本実施形態に係る音響制御装置では、フェーダー操作子51の操作可能範囲RCは、第1範囲RC1、第2範囲RC2及び第3範囲RC3を含む。
 第1範囲RC1は、第1位置PC1と第2位置PC2との間の範囲である。第2位置PC2は、第1位置PC1に対して+DC方向に位置する。+DC方向は、第1端部TC1から第2端部TC2に向かう第1操作方向に相当する。
 第2範囲RC2は、第2位置PC2と第3位置PC3との間の範囲である。第3位置PC3は、第2位置PC2に対して+DC方向に位置する。
 第3範囲RC3は、第3位置PC3と第4位置PC4との間の範囲である。第4位置PC4は、第3位置PC3に対して+DC方向に位置する。
 BPM設定部66は、フェーダー操作子51が+DC方向に移動されるに従って、第1楽曲の再生時BPM及び第2楽曲の再生時BPMを第2楽曲のBPMに近づける。BPM設定部66は、第1操作子33A1が-DA方向に移動されるに従って、或いは、第2操作子33B1が+DB方向に移動されるに従って、第1楽曲の再生時BPM及び第2楽曲の再生時BPMを第2楽曲のBPMに近づける。
 このような構成によれば、第2楽曲のBPMに近づくように、各楽曲の再生時BPMを変化させることができる。従って、各楽曲の再生時BPMを第2楽曲のBPMに近づけるときの操作を簡略化できる。
[Effects of second embodiment]
The sound control device according to the present embodiment described above can have the same effects as the sound control device 1 according to the first embodiment described above, and can also have the following effects.
In the sound control device according to the present embodiment, the operable range RC of the fader operator 51 includes a first range RC1, a second range RC2, and a third range RC3.
The first range RC1 is a range between the first position PC1 and the second position PC2. The second position PC2 is located in the +DC direction with respect to the first position PC1. The +DC direction corresponds to a first operation direction from the first end TC1 to the second end TC2.
The second range RC2 is a range between the second position PC2 and the third position PC3. The third position PC3 is located in the +DC direction with respect to the second position PC2.
The third range RC3 is a range between the third position PC3 and the fourth position PC4. The fourth position PC4 is located in the +DC direction with respect to the third position PC3.
As the fader operator 51 is moved in the +DC direction, the BPM setting unit 66 brings the BPM of the first music piece and the second music piece closer to the BPM of the second music piece. The BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM during playback of the first music piece and the BPM during playback of the second music piece as the first operator 33A1 is moved in the -DA direction or as the second operator 33B1 is moved in the +DB direction. The time BPM is brought closer to the BPM of the second song.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the BPM of each song during playback so that it approaches the BPM of the second song. Therefore, the operation for bringing the BPM of each song closer to the BPM of the second song during reproduction can be simplified.
 本実施形態に係る音響制御装置では、BPM設定部66は、フェーダー操作子51が第2範囲RC2に配置されている場合、第1楽曲の再生時BPM及び第2楽曲の再生時BPMを変更しない。
 このような構成によれば、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とのそれぞれが耳に入りやすい第2範囲RC2にフェーダー操作子51が配置されている場合に、各楽曲の再生時BPMを変更しないことによって、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とを違和感なく容易にミキシングできる。
In the sound control device according to the present embodiment, when the fader operator 51 is arranged in the second range RC2, the BPM setting unit 66 does not change the BPM when playing the first song and the BPM when playing the second song. .
According to such a configuration, when the fader operator 51 is arranged in the second range RC2 where each of the first music piece and the second music piece can be easily heard, the BPM is not changed when each music piece is played. This allows the first music and the second music to be easily mixed without any discomfort.
 本実施形態に係る音響制御装置では、音量調節部65Aは、フェーダー操作子51が第2範囲RC2に配置されている場合、第1楽曲の高周波帯域、第1楽曲の中周波帯域、第2楽曲の高周波帯域及び第2楽曲の中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルが設定済レベルH1lv,M1lv,H2lv,M2lvである状態にて、フェーダー操作子51が+DC方向に操作されるに従って第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを低下させるとともに、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを増加させる。
 上記のように、設定済レベルH1lvは、第1楽曲の高周波帯域の最大レベルとして、第1チャンネル操作部3Aの高周波帯域調節部322を用いてユーザーによって設定された音量レベルである。設定済レベルM1lv,H2lv,M2lvも同様である。
 また、+DC方向は、第1操作方向に相当する。
 このような構成によれば、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの低周波成分の合計音量を、各低周波成分のミックス前の合計音量と同程度に維持できる。これにより、周波数を調整せずに第1楽曲全体と第2楽曲全体とをミックスする場合に比べて、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とのミックス中に低周波成分が強く聞こえることを抑制できる。また、各楽曲は、中間値のBPMにて再生されるので、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とを違和感なくミックスできる。
In the sound control device according to the present embodiment, when the fader operator 51 is arranged in the second range RC2, the volume adjustment section 65A is configured to control the high frequency band of the first song, the middle frequency band of the first song, and the second song. When the volume levels of the high frequency band and the medium frequency band of the second song are at the set levels H1lv, M1lv, H2lv, M2lv, as the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction, the volume level of the first song becomes lower. While decreasing the volume level of the frequency band, the volume level of the low frequency band of the second music piece is increased.
As described above, the set level H1lv is the volume level set by the user using the high frequency band adjustment section 322 of the first channel operation section 3A as the maximum level of the high frequency band of the first song. The same applies to the set levels M1lv, H2lv, and M2lv.
Further, the +DC direction corresponds to the first operation direction.
According to such a configuration, the total volume of the low frequency components of each of the first music piece and the second music piece can be maintained at the same level as the total volume of each low frequency component before mixing. Thereby, compared to the case where the entire first music piece and the entire second music piece are mixed without adjusting the frequency, it is possible to suppress the low frequency components from being heard strongly during the mixing of the first music piece and the second music piece. Moreover, since each song is played at an intermediate BPM, the first song and the second song can be mixed without any discomfort.
 本実施形態に係る音響制御装置では、第1位置PC1は、第1端部TC1であり、第4位置PC4は、第2端部TC2である。第1範囲RC1は、第1端部TC1から操作可能範囲RCにおける1/3の範囲である。第2範囲RC2は、第2位置PC2から操作可能範囲RCにおける1/3の範囲である。第3範囲RC3は、第3位置PC3から操作可能範囲RCにおける1/3の範囲である。
 このような構成によれば、ユーザーが第1範囲RC1、第2範囲RC2及び第3範囲RC3のそれぞれの位置を直感的に把握できる。従って、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とをミックスするときのフェーダー操作子51の操作を実施しやすくすることができる。
In the acoustic control device according to this embodiment, the first position PC1 is the first end TC1, and the fourth position PC4 is the second end TC2. The first range RC1 is 1/3 of the operable range RC from the first end TC1. The second range RC2 is 1/3 of the operable range RC from the second position PC2. The third range RC3 is 1/3 of the operable range RC from the third position PC3.
According to such a configuration, the user can intuitively grasp the respective positions of the first range RC1, the second range RC2, and the third range RC3. Therefore, it is possible to easily operate the fader operator 51 when mixing the first music and the second music.
 [第3実施形態]
 次に、本発明の第3実施形態について説明する。
 本実施形態に係る音響制御装置は、第1及び第2実施形態に係る音響制御装置と同様の構成を備えるが、操作判定部、再生制御部、位置設定部及び位置選択部を更に備える点で、第1及び第2実施形態に係る音響制御装置と相違する。なお、以下の説明では、既に説明した部分と同一又は略同一である部分については、同一の符号を付して説明を省略する。
[Third embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The sound control device according to the present embodiment has the same configuration as the sound control devices according to the first and second embodiments, except that it further includes an operation determination section, a playback control section, a position setting section, and a position selection section. , is different from the sound control device according to the first and second embodiments. In the following description, parts that are the same or substantially the same as parts that have already been described are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.
 図15は、本実施形態に係る音響制御装置が備える制御部6Bの構成を示すブロック図である。
 本実施形態に係る音響制御装置は、第1実施形態に係る制御部6、及び、第2実施形態に係る制御部6Aに代えて、図15に示す制御部6Bを備える他は、第1及び第2実施形態に係る音響制御装置と同様の構成及び機能を備える。
 すなわち、図示を省略するが、本実施形態に係る音響制御装置は、筐体2と、2つのチャンネル操作部3と、モード切替スイッチ4と、クロスフェーダー5とを備える他、図15に示す制御部6Bを備える。
 制御部6Bは、制御部6,6Aと同様に、本実施形態に係る音響制御装置を制御するものであり、図示しない記憶部に記憶された音響制御プログラムを読み出して実行するCPU(Central Processing Unit)等のプロセッサーを備えて構成されている。すなわち、プロセッサーは、コンピューターである。
 制御部6Bは、制御部6Aが備える構成に加えて、操作判定部67、再生制御部68、位置設定部69、位置選択部70を更に備える。なお、操作判定部67及び再生制御部68は、音響制御装置の動作モードがアシストモードである場合に機能する。
FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control section 6B included in the acoustic control device according to this embodiment.
The sound control device according to the present embodiment includes a control section 6B shown in FIG. 15 instead of the control section 6 according to the first embodiment and the control section 6A according to the second embodiment. It has the same configuration and functions as the acoustic control device according to the second embodiment.
That is, although not shown in the drawings, the audio control device according to the present embodiment includes a housing 2, two channel operation sections 3, a mode changeover switch 4, and a crossfader 5, as well as the control shown in FIG. A section 6B is provided.
The control unit 6B, like the control units 6 and 6A, controls the audio control device according to the present embodiment, and includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) that reads and executes an audio control program stored in a storage unit (not shown). ) and other processors. That is, the processor is a computer.
The control unit 6B further includes an operation determination unit 67, a playback control unit 68, a position setting unit 69, and a position selection unit 70 in addition to the configuration included in the control unit 6A. Note that the operation determination section 67 and the reproduction control section 68 function when the operation mode of the acoustic control device is the assist mode.
 [操作判定部の構成]
 操作判定部67は、フェーダー操作子51の操作を判定する。具体的に、操作判定部67は、第1端部TC1及び第2端部TC2のうち一方の端部から他方の端部に達したときのフェーダー操作子51の速度が所定値以上であるか否かを判定する。換言すると、操作判定部67は、第1端部TC1及び第2端部TC2のうち一方の端部から他方の端部に達するまでの時間が所定時間未満であるか否かを判定する。詳述すると、操作判定部67は、第1端部TC1及び第2端部TC2のうち一方の端部に位置するフェーダー操作子51が他方の端部に向かって操作されてから、所定時間の間に他方の端部に到達したか否かを判定する。
[Configuration of operation determination unit]
The operation determination unit 67 determines the operation of the fader operator 51. Specifically, the operation determination unit 67 determines whether the speed of the fader operator 51 when reaching the other end from one of the first end TC1 and the second end TC2 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value. Determine whether or not. In other words, the operation determination unit 67 determines whether the time from one end to the other end of the first end TC1 and the second end TC2 is less than a predetermined time. Specifically, the operation determination unit 67 determines whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fader operator 51 located at one end of the first end TC1 and the second end TC2 was operated toward the other end. In the meantime, it is determined whether the other end has been reached.
 [再生制御部の構成]
 再生制御部68は、フェーダー操作子51の操作に応じて、第1再生部61による第1楽曲の再生状態、及び、第2再生部62による第2楽曲の再生状態を制御する。具体的に、再生制御部68は、操作判定部67による判定結果に基づいて、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生位置を制御する。
[Configuration of playback control unit]
The playback control unit 68 controls the playback state of the first music piece by the first playback unit 61 and the playback state of the second music piece by the second playback unit 62 in accordance with the operation of the fader operator 51. Specifically, the playback control unit 68 controls the respective playback positions of the first music piece and the second music piece based on the determination result by the operation determination unit 67.
 再生制御部68は、第1端部TC1及び第2端部TC2のうち一方の端部から他方の端部に達したときのフェーダー操作子51の速度が所定値以上であると判定された場合には、以下の第1再生制御処理を実行し、当該速度が所定値未満であると判定された場合には、以下の第2再生制御処理を実行する。
 換言すると、再生制御部68は、第1端部TC1及び第2端部TC2のうち一方の端部から他方の端部に到達したときの時間である到達時間が所定時間以上であると判定された場合には、以下の第1再生制御処理を実行し、当該到達時間が所定時間未満であると判定された場合には、以下の第2再生制御処理を実行する。
When the playback control unit 68 determines that the speed of the fader operator 51 when reaching the other end from one end of the first end TC1 and the second end TC2 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value. In this case, the following first regeneration control process is executed, and if the speed is determined to be less than a predetermined value, the following second regeneration control process is executed.
In other words, the reproduction control unit 68 determines that the arrival time, which is the time taken to reach the other end from one end of the first end TC1 and the second end TC2, is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. If the arrival time is determined to be less than the predetermined time, the following first reproduction control process is executed, and if it is determined that the arrival time is less than the predetermined time, the following second reproduction control process is executed.
 具体的に、再生制御部68は、第1端部TC1及び第2端部TC2のうち一方の端部から離れたフェーダー操作子51が所定時間未満の時間で他方の端部に到達した場合には、以下の第2再生制御処理を実行し、所定時間が経過しても他方の端部に到達していない場合には、以下の第1再生制御処理を実行する。
 なお、いずれの再生制御処理においても、フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1又は第2端部TC2に配置されている場合には、再生制御部68は、第1再生部61による第1楽曲の再生、及び、第2再生部62による第2楽曲の再生に対する制御は行わない。
Specifically, the playback control unit 68 controls the playback control unit 68 when the fader operator 51 that is away from one of the first end TC1 and the second end TC2 reaches the other end in less than a predetermined time. executes the following second regeneration control process, and if the other end has not been reached even after a predetermined time has elapsed, executes the following first regeneration control process.
In any of the playback control processes, if the fader operator 51 is placed at the first end TC1 or the second end TC2, the playback control unit 68 controls the first music piece by the first playback unit 61. and the reproduction of the second music piece by the second reproduction section 62 are not controlled.
 [第1再生制御処理]
 第1再生制御処理は、フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1及び第2端部TC2のうち一方の端部から他方の端部にゆっくり操作されたときに実施される処理である。以下の説明では、フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1から第2端部TC2に操作される場合について説明する。
 フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1から+DC方向に操作されると、再生制御部68は、第1楽曲の再生位置を所定の第1再生位置に移動させるとともに、第2楽曲の再生位置を所定の第3再生位置に移動させる。なお、第2再生部62による第2楽曲の再生が停止されている場合には、再生制御部68は、第2再生部62に第2楽曲の再生を開始させる。
[First playback control process]
The first playback control process is a process performed when the fader operator 51 is slowly operated from one end of the first end TC1 and the second end TC2 to the other end. In the following description, a case will be described in which the fader operator 51 is operated from the first end TC1 to the second end TC2.
When the fader operator 51 is operated from the first end TC1 in the +DC direction, the playback control unit 68 moves the playback position of the first song to a predetermined first playback position, and moves the playback position of the second song to a predetermined first playback position. to a predetermined third playback position. Note that if the second playback section 62 has stopped playing the second song, the playback control section 68 causes the second playback section 62 to start playing the second song.
 第1楽曲の再生位置が第1再生位置に移動すると、再生制御部68は、第1再生位置と、第1再生位置よりも後の再生位置である所定の第2再生位置との間をループ再生させる。また、第2楽曲の再生位置が第3再生位置に移動すると、再生制御部68は、第3再生位置と、第3再生位置よりも後の再生位置である所定の第4再生位置との間をループ再生させる。すなわち、フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1から+DC方向に操作された場合に移動される第2楽曲の再生位置は、第4再生位置よりも前の再生位置である第3再生位置である。
 フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2に到達すると、再生制御部68は、第1再生部61による第1楽曲のループ再生を解除するとともに、第2再生部62による第2楽曲のループ再生を解除する。
 これにより、第1楽曲から第2楽曲への入れ替えとともに、第2楽曲の第4再生位置を再生可能となる。
When the playback position of the first song moves to the first playback position, the playback control unit 68 loops between the first playback position and a predetermined second playback position that is a playback position after the first playback position. Let it play. Further, when the playback position of the second song moves to the third playback position, the playback control unit 68 controls the playback position between the third playback position and a predetermined fourth playback position that is a playback position after the third playback position. play in a loop. That is, the playback position of the second music piece moved when the fader operator 51 is operated from the first end TC1 in the +DC direction is the third playback position, which is the playback position before the fourth playback position. .
When the fader operator 51 reaches the second end TC2, the playback control section 68 cancels the loop playback of the first song by the first playback section 61, and causes the second playback section 62 to stop the loop playback of the second song. unlock.
This makes it possible to replace the first song with the second song and to play the second song at the fourth playback position.
 [第1再生制御処理の具体例]
 図16は、再生制御部68による第1再生制御処理の一例を説明する図である。なお、図16では、「Breakdown」を「Break」と表記する。
 次に、第1再生制御処理の具体例を、図16を参照して説明する。
 図16の例では、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれは、イントロ(Intro)、ブレイクダウン1(Breakdown1)、ビルドアップ1(Buildup1)、ドロップ1(Drop1)、ブレイクダウン2(Breakdown2)、ビルドアップ2(Buildup2)、ドロップ2(Drop2)、アウトロ(Outro)の順に楽曲構成要素が繋がった楽曲である。図16の例では、第1楽曲の第1再生位置としてアウトロの開始位置が設定され、第1楽曲の第2再生位置としてアウトロの終了位置、すなわち、第1楽曲の終了位置が設定されている。図16の例では、第2楽曲の第3再生位置としてビルドアップ1の途中の位置が設定され、第2楽曲の第4再生位置としてドロップ1の開始位置が設定されている。
[Specific example of first playback control process]
FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of the first reproduction control process by the reproduction control section 68. Note that in FIG. 16, "Breakdown" is written as "Break".
Next, a specific example of the first reproduction control process will be described with reference to FIG. 16.
In the example of FIG. 16, the first song and the second song each include intro (Intro), breakdown 1 (Breakdown1), buildup 1 (Buildup1), drop 1 (Drop1), breakdown 2 (Breakdown2), It is a song in which the song components are connected in the order of Buildup 2, Drop 2, and Outro. In the example of FIG. 16, the outro start position is set as the first playback position of the first song, and the outro end position, that is, the end position of the first song, is set as the second playback position of the first song. . In the example of FIG. 16, a position in the middle of build-up 1 is set as the third playback position of the second song, and a start position of drop 1 is set as the fourth playback position of the second song.
 例えば図16の上から1段目に示すように、フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1に配置されていると、再生制御部68は、第1再生部61による第1楽曲の再生及び第2再生部62による第2楽曲の再生を制御しない。このため、第1楽曲は、第1再生部61によって、第1楽曲のBPMにて再生される。
 図16の上から2段目に示すように、フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1から+DC方向に操作されると、再生制御部68は、第1楽曲の再生位置PP1をアウトロの開始位置(第1再生位置)に移動するとともに、第2楽曲の再生位置PP2をビルドアップ1の途中の位置(第3再生位置)に移動する。上記のように、第2楽曲の再生が停止されている場合には、再生制御部68は、第2再生部62に第2楽曲の再生を開始させる。
For example, as shown in the first row from the top of FIG. The reproduction of the second music piece by the second reproduction unit 62 is not controlled. Therefore, the first music piece is played back by the first playback unit 61 at the BPM of the first music piece.
As shown in the second row from the top of FIG. 16, when the fader operator 51 is operated from the first end TC1 in the +DC direction, the playback control unit 68 changes the playback position PP1 of the first song to the outro start position. (first playback position), and also moves the playback position PP2 of the second music piece to a position in the middle of build-up 1 (third playback position). As described above, when the reproduction of the second music piece is stopped, the reproduction control unit 68 causes the second reproduction unit 62 to start playing the second music piece.
 図16の上から3段目に示すように、第1楽曲の再生位置PP1が第1楽曲のアウトロの開始位置に移動すると、再生制御部68は、第1楽曲のアウトロの開始位置とアウトロの終了位置(第2再生位置)との間の楽曲部分を第1再生部61にリピート再生させる。これとともに、第2楽曲の再生位置PP2がビルドアップ1の途中の位置に移動すると、再生制御部68は、第2楽曲のビルドアップ1の途中の位置とドロップ1の開始位置(第4再生位置)との間の楽曲部分を第2再生部62にリピート再生させる。 As shown in the third row from the top of FIG. 16, when the playback position PP1 of the first song moves to the outro start position of the first song, the playback control unit 68 controls the outro start position of the first song and the outro start position of the first song. The first playback unit 61 is caused to repeatedly play back the music portion between the ending position (second playback position). At the same time, when the playback position PP2 of the second song moves to a position in the middle of build-up 1, the playback control unit 68 controls the position in the middle of build-up 1 of the second song and the start position of drop 1 (fourth playback position ) is caused to be repeatedly played back by the second playback section 62.
 図16の上から4段目に示すように、フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2に配置されると、再生制御部68は、第1楽曲のリピート再生及び第2楽曲のリピート再生を解除する。これにより、第1再生部61による第1楽曲の再生は、第1楽曲のアウトロの再生終了に伴って終了し、第2再生部62による第2楽曲の再生は継続して行われ、しばらくして第2楽曲のドロップ1が再生される。上記のように、フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2に配置されると、音量調節部65によって、第1楽曲全体の音量は、第1最小音量V1minに設定されるとともに、第2楽曲全体の音量は、第2設定済音量V2stに設定される。また、BPM設定部66によって、各楽曲の再生時BPMは、第2楽曲のBPMに設定される。 As shown in the fourth row from the top of FIG. 16, when the fader operator 51 is placed at the second end TC2, the playback control unit 68 cancels the repeat playback of the first song and the repeat playback of the second song. do. As a result, the playback of the first music piece by the first playback unit 61 ends when the playback of the outro of the first music piece ends, and the playback of the second music piece by the second playback unit 62 continues, and after a while. Drop 1 of the second song is played. As described above, when the fader operator 51 is placed at the second end TC2, the volume adjustment section 65 sets the volume of the entire first song to the first minimum volume V1min, and sets the volume of the entire second song to the first minimum volume V1min. The volume is set to the second set volume V2st. Further, the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM of each song at the time of reproduction to the BPM of the second song.
 以上、フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1から第2端部TC2に操作される場合について説明した。しかしながら、フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2から第1端部TC1に操作される場合も同様である。
 すなわち、フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2から-DC方向に操作されると、再生位置PP2が第2楽曲の第1再生位置に移動された後、第1再生位置と第2再生位置との間の楽曲部分がリピート再生されるとともに、再生位置PP1が第1楽曲の第3再生位置に移動された後、第3再生位置と第4再生位置との間の楽曲部分がリピート再生される。そして、フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1に配置されると、再生制御部68によって、各楽曲のリピート再生が解除される。
 このように、フェーダー操作子51の第1端部TC1からの操作、及び、第2端部TC2からの操作に応じて、第1楽曲の再生位置及び第2楽曲の再生位置が制御されることによって、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とのミックスを自然に実施できる。
The case where the fader operator 51 is operated from the first end TC1 to the second end TC2 has been described above. However, the same applies when the fader operator 51 is operated from the second end TC2 to the first end TC1.
That is, when the fader operator 51 is operated from the second end TC2 in the -DC direction, the playback position PP2 is moved to the first playback position of the second song, and then the first playback position and the second playback position are moved. The music part between is played repeatedly, and after the playback position PP1 is moved to the third playback position of the first music, the music part between the third playback position and the fourth playback position is played repeatedly. . Then, when the fader operator 51 is placed at the first end TC1, the playback control section 68 cancels the repeat playback of each song.
In this way, the playback position of the first music piece and the playback position of the second music piece are controlled in accordance with the operation from the first end TC1 and the second end TC2 of the fader operator 51. Accordingly, it is possible to mix the first music piece and the second music piece naturally.
 [端部到達時の楽曲の再生]
 上記した再生制御部68は、+DC方向に操作されたフェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2に到達した時点で、第2楽曲における第3再生位置と第4再生位置との間の楽曲部分のリピート再生を解除するとした。すなわち、第2楽曲の再生は、リピート再生が解除されるものの、フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2に到達した時点での再生位置からの再生が継続されるとした。しかしながら、再生制御部68は、以下の第1パターン及び第2パターンのうちの1つを実施してもよい。
[Play music when reaching the end]
When the fader operator 51 operated in the +DC direction reaches the second end TC2, the playback control unit 68 described above controls the reproduction of the music part between the third playback position and the fourth playback position in the second music piece. I decided to cancel repeat playback. In other words, although repeat playback is canceled for the second music piece, playback continues from the playback position at the time when the fader operator 51 reaches the second end TC2. However, the reproduction control unit 68 may implement one of the following first pattern and second pattern.
 第1パターンでは、フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2に到達したタイミングにて、第2楽曲の再生位置PP2を第4再生位置に移動させる。図16の例では、第1楽曲全体の音量が第1最小音量V1minとなるタイミングにて第2楽曲のドロップ1が再生されるので、第1楽曲から第2楽曲の入れ替えを自然に実施できる。
 第2パターンでは、フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2に到達したタイミングでの第2楽曲の再生位置PP2が小節の区切りに到達していない場合には、現在の小節の再生が終了したタイミングにて、再生位置PP2を第4再生位置に移動させる。図16の例では、第2楽曲の再生位置PP2が小節の区切りにてドロップ1に移動されるので、急激な構成の変化が生じないように各楽曲を自然にミックスできる。
In the first pattern, the playback position PP2 of the second music piece is moved to the fourth playback position at the timing when the fader operator 51 reaches the second end TC2. In the example of FIG. 16, since drop 1 of the second song is played at the timing when the volume of the entire first song reaches the first minimum volume V1min, it is possible to naturally replace the first song with the second song.
In the second pattern, if the playback position PP2 of the second music piece at the timing when the fader operator 51 reaches the second end TC2 has not reached the bar break, the timing at which the playback of the current bar ends is determined. , the playback position PP2 is moved to the fourth playback position. In the example of FIG. 16, the playback position PP2 of the second song is moved to drop 1 at bar breaks, so each song can be mixed naturally so that sudden changes in composition do not occur.
 [第2再生制御処理]
 第2再生制御処理は、フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1及び第2端部TC2のうち一方の端部から他方の端部に瞬間的に操作されたときに実施される処理である。具体的に、第2再生制御処理は、フェーダー操作子51が第1端部TC1から第2端部TC2に瞬間的に操作された場合には第2楽曲の再生位置を第2楽曲の第4再生位置に移動し、第2端部TC2から第1端部TC1に瞬間的に操作された場合には第1楽曲の再生位置を第1楽曲の第4再生位置に移動する。この場合、音量調節部65によって、第1楽曲全体の音量には第1最小音量V1minが設定されることから、第1楽曲は出力されない。
 図16に示した第2楽曲が第2再生部62によって再生される場合で、第2再生制御処理が再生制御部68にて実行された場合、第1楽曲の再生位置は変更されずに、第2楽曲の再生位置がドロップ1の開始位置に移動される。なお、第2再生部62による第2楽曲の再生が停止されている場合には、再生制御部68は、第2再生部62に第2楽曲の再生を開始させる。なお、上記した音量調節部65Aによって、フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2に到達した時点で、第1楽曲の全体音量は最小値となり、第2楽曲の全体音量は最大値となる。また、BPM設定部66によって、各楽曲の再生時BPMは、第2楽曲のBPMに設定される。
 このような第2再生制御処理により、第1楽曲から第2楽曲に瞬時に切り替える場合に、第2楽曲のサビ部分を瞬時に再生できる。
[Second playback control process]
The second playback control process is a process performed when the fader operator 51 is instantaneously operated from one end of the first end TC1 and the second end TC2 to the other end. Specifically, in the second playback control process, when the fader operator 51 is momentarily operated from the first end TC1 to the second end TC2, the second playback control process changes the playback position of the second song to the fourth end of the second song. When the player moves to the playback position and momentarily operates from the second end TC2 to the first end TC1, the playback position of the first music piece is moved to the fourth playback position of the first music piece. In this case, the first minimum volume V1min is set as the volume of the entire first music piece by the volume adjustment unit 65, so the first music piece is not output.
In the case where the second music piece shown in FIG. 16 is played back by the second playback unit 62 and the second playback control process is executed by the playback control unit 68, the playback position of the first music piece is not changed; The playback position of the second song is moved to the start position of drop 1. Note that if the second playback section 62 has stopped playing the second song, the playback control section 68 causes the second playback section 62 to start playing the second song. Note that, when the fader operator 51 reaches the second end TC2, the overall volume of the first music piece becomes the minimum value and the overall volume of the second music piece becomes the maximum value by the above-mentioned volume adjustment section 65A. Furthermore, the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM of each song during playback to the BPM of the second song.
With such second playback control processing, when instantly switching from the first song to the second song, the chorus of the second song can be instantly played back.
 [位置設定部及び位置選択部の構成]
 図15に示した位置設定部69は、第1再生位置、第2再生位置、第3再生位置及び第4再生位置に設定可能なポイントを、ユーザーの操作に応じて各楽曲に設定する。例えば、このようなポイントとしてキューが挙げられる。また例えば、当該ポイントとして、楽曲に含まれる各構成要素の開始位置が挙げられる。なお、構成要素は、上記のように、イントロ、ドロップ及びアウトロ等の構成要素である。
 位置選択部70は、音響制御装置の動作モードがアシストモードである場合に機能する。位置選択部70は、位置設定部69によって設定されたポイントから、ユーザーの操作に応じて、各楽曲の第1再生位置、第2再生位置、第3再生位置及び第4再生位置を選択する。位置選択部70によって選択された各再生位置は、上記した再生制御部68による第1再生制御処理及び第2再生制御処理に利用される。
 このような位置設定部69及び位置選択部70によって、ユーザーの任意の位置に、各再生位置を設定及び選択できる。
[Configuration of position setting section and position selection section]
The position setting unit 69 shown in FIG. 15 sets points that can be set at the first playback position, the second playback position, the third playback position, and the fourth playback position for each song according to the user's operation. An example of such a point is a cue. Further, for example, the point may be the start position of each component included in the song. Note that, as described above, the constituent elements are constituent elements such as an intro, a drop, and an outro.
The position selection unit 70 functions when the operation mode of the acoustic control device is the assist mode. The position selection unit 70 selects a first playback position, a second playback position, a third playback position, and a fourth playback position of each song from the points set by the position setting unit 69 according to the user's operation. Each playback position selected by the position selection unit 70 is used in the first playback control process and the second playback control process by the playback control unit 68 described above.
The position setting section 69 and the position selection section 70 allow the user to set and select each playback position at an arbitrary position.
 [第3実施形態の効果]
 以上説明した本実施形態に係る音響制御装置は、第1及び第2実施形態に係る音響制御装置が奏する効果を奏することができる。
[Effects of third embodiment]
The sound control device according to the present embodiment described above can produce the effects that the sound control devices according to the first and second embodiments have.
 [実施形態の変形]
 本発明は、上記各実施形態に限定されるものではなく、本発明の目的を達成できる範囲での変形及び改良等は、本発明に含まれるものである。
 上記各実施形態では、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲の音量及び再生時BPMを調節する操作子として、クロスフェーダー5のフェーダー操作子51、第1チャンネルフェーダー33Aの第1操作子33A1、及び、第2チャンネルフェーダー33Bの第2操作子33B1を挙げた。しかしながら、これに限らず、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの音量を同時に又は個別に調節する操作子は、スライド可能な操作子でなくてもよく、例えば回転軸を中心として回転可能な操作つまみであってもよい。すなわち、本発明における操作子は、他の操作子であってもよい。
 また、本発明に係る音響制御装置は、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの音量を調節するための操作子と、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMを設定するための操作子とを、個別に備えていてもよい。例えば、本発明に係る音響制御装置は、各楽曲の音量を調節するフェーダー操作子と、各楽曲の再生時BPMを設定するフェーダー操作子とを個別に備えていてもよい。
[Modification of embodiment]
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and modifications and improvements within the range that can achieve the purpose of the present invention are included in the present invention.
In each of the above embodiments, the fader operator 51 of the crossfader 5, the first operator 33A1 of the first channel fader 33A, and the The second operator 33B1 of the two-channel fader 33B is listed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the controls that adjust the volumes of the first music piece and the second music piece simultaneously or individually may not be slidable controls, for example, the controls that can be rotated around a rotation axis. It may be a knob. That is, the operator in the present invention may be another operator.
Further, the sound control device according to the present invention includes an operator for adjusting the volume of each of the first song and the second song, and an operation for setting the BPM during playback of each of the first song and the second song. The child may be provided separately. For example, the sound control device according to the present invention may separately include a fader operator that adjusts the volume of each song and a fader operator that sets the BPM when each song is played.
 また、本発明の音響制御装置は、アシストモードのみを動作モードとして備えていてもよい。更に、本発明の音響制御装置は、複数の操作子を備え、複数の操作子のうちの1つの操作子が操作された場合には、音量調節部65,65A及びBPM設定部66がノーマルモードにて機能し、他の操作子が操作された場合には、音量調節部65,65A及びBPM設定部66がアシストモードにて機能してもよい。 Furthermore, the acoustic control device of the present invention may include only the assist mode as the operation mode. Furthermore, the sound control device of the present invention includes a plurality of operators, and when one of the plurality of operators is operated, the volume adjustment units 65, 65A and the BPM setting unit 66 are set to the normal mode. When other operators are operated, the volume adjustment sections 65, 65A and the BPM setting section 66 may function in an assist mode.
 上記各実施形態では、第1楽曲のBPMは、第1テンポスライダー34Aによって第1楽曲の再生時BPMが調節されている場合には、調節後の再生時BPMであり、第1テンポスライダー34Aによって第1楽曲の再生時BPMが調節されていない場合には、第1楽曲の原曲のBPMであるとした。同様に、第2楽曲のBPMは、第2テンポスライダー34Bによって第2楽曲の再生時BPMが調節されている場合には、調節後の再生時BPMであり、第2テンポスライダー34Bによって第2楽曲の再生時BPMが調節されていない場合には、第2楽曲の原曲のBPMであるとした。しかしながら、これに限らず、第1楽曲のBPMは、第1テンポスライダー34Aによって第1楽曲の再生時BPMが調節されている場合でも、第1楽曲の原曲のBPMであってもよい。同様に、第2楽曲のBPMは、第2テンポスライダー34Bによって第2楽曲の再生時BPMが調節されている場合でも、第2楽曲の原曲のBPMであってもよい。 In each of the above embodiments, the BPM of the first song is the adjusted BPM when playing the first song when the BPM when playing the first song is adjusted by the first tempo slider 34A; If the BPM during playback of the first song is not adjusted, it is determined that the BPM is the BPM of the original song of the first song. Similarly, if the BPM of the second song is adjusted by the second tempo slider 34B, the BPM of the second song is the adjusted BPM of the second song. If the BPM is not adjusted during playback, it is assumed that the BPM is that of the original song of the second song. However, the BPM of the first song is not limited to this, and may be the BPM of the original song of the first song even if the BPM during playback of the first song is adjusted by the first tempo slider 34A. Similarly, the BPM of the second song may be the BPM of the original song of the second song even if the BPM during reproduction of the second song is adjusted by the second tempo slider 34B.
 上記各実施形態では、BPM設定部66は、操作可能範囲RCにおける中間位置にフェーダー操作子51が配置された場合、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMを上記中間値とした。しかしながら、これに限らず、各楽曲の低周波帯域の音量が同じになるときのフェーダー操作子51の位置は、必ずしも操作可能範囲RCにおける中間位置でなくてもよい。
 上記第2実施形態において、音量調節部65Aによって第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量と第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量とが同じになるときのフェーダー操作子51の位置も、必ずしも操作可能範囲RCにおける中間位置でなくてもよい。
In each of the embodiments described above, when the fader operator 51 is placed at an intermediate position in the operable range RC, the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM of each of the first music piece and the second music piece to the above intermediate value during reproduction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the position of the fader operator 51 when the volume of the low frequency band of each song becomes the same does not necessarily have to be an intermediate position in the operable range RC.
In the second embodiment, the position of the fader operator 51 when the volume adjustment unit 65A makes the volume of the low frequency band of the first song the same as the volume of the low frequency band of the second song is not necessarily within the operable range. It does not have to be an intermediate position in RC.
 上記各実施形態では、音量調節部65,65Aは、フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2に配置されると、第1楽曲の音量を最小値とし、第2楽曲の音量を最大値とするとした。また、BPM設定部66は、フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2に配置されると、第1楽曲の再生時BPMと第2楽曲の再生時BPMとを、第2楽曲のBPMに設定するとした。しかしながら、これに限らず、フェーダー操作子51が第2端部TC2に配置されると、出力音量に占める第2楽曲の音量の割合が最大となればよい。また、第1楽曲の音量が最小値となる場合には、BPM設定部66は、第1楽曲の再生時BPMを、第2楽曲のBPMに設定しなくてもよい。 In each of the embodiments described above, when the fader operator 51 is placed at the second end TC2, the volume adjustment sections 65 and 65A set the volume of the first song to the minimum value and set the volume of the second song to the maximum value. did. Further, when the fader operator 51 is placed at the second end TC2, the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM when playing the first song and the BPM when playing the second song to the BPM of the second song. did. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and when the fader operator 51 is disposed at the second end TC2, it is sufficient that the ratio of the volume of the second music piece to the output volume is maximized. Further, when the volume of the first song is the minimum value, the BPM setting unit 66 does not need to set the BPM during reproduction of the first song to the BPM of the second song.
 上記第2実施形態では、操作可能範囲RCは、第1範囲RC1、第2範囲RC2及び第3範囲RC3を含むとした。図12に示した例において、第1範囲RC1では、BPM設定部66は、第1楽曲の再生時BPMと第2楽曲の再生時BPMとを、フェーダー操作子51の位置に応じて、第1楽曲のBPMから第1楽曲のBPMと前記第2楽曲のBPMとの中間値までの範囲で設定するとした。第2範囲RC2では、BPM設定部66は、第1楽曲の再生時BPM及び前記第2楽曲の再生時BPMを変更しないとした。第3範囲RC3では、BPM設定部66は、第1楽曲の再生時BPMと第2楽曲の再生時BPMとを、上記中間値から第2楽曲のBPMまでの範囲で設定するとした。
 しかしながら、これに限らず、BPM設定部66は、第2範囲RC2においても第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMを変化させてもよい。このとき、BPM設定部66は、第1範囲RC1及び第3範囲RC3とは異なる変化率によって、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMを変化させてもよい。
 また、例えば第1範囲RC1の一部と第2範囲RC2の一部とは互いに重なっていてもよく、第2範囲RC2の一部と第3範囲RC3の一部とは互いに重なっていてもよい。
In the second embodiment, the operable range RC includes the first range RC1, the second range RC2, and the third range RC3. In the example shown in FIG. 12, in the first range RC1, the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM at the time of reproduction of the first music piece and the BPM at the time of reproduction of the second music piece according to the position of the fader operator 51. It is assumed that the setting range is from the BPM of the song to the intermediate value between the BPM of the first song and the BPM of the second song. In the second range RC2, the BPM setting unit 66 does not change the BPM when playing the first song and the BPM when playing the second song. In the third range RC3, the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM when playing the first song and the BPM when playing the second song in a range from the above-mentioned intermediate value to the BPM of the second song.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the BPM setting unit 66 may change the BPM of each of the first music piece and the second music piece during reproduction also in the second range RC2. At this time, the BPM setting unit 66 may change the BPM during playback of each of the first music piece and the second music piece at a rate of change different from that in the first range RC1 and the third range RC3.
Further, for example, a part of the first range RC1 and a part of the second range RC2 may overlap with each other, and a part of the second range RC2 and a part of the third range RC3 may overlap with each other. .
 上記第2実施形態では、フェーダー操作子51が第1範囲RC1に配置されている場合、音量調節部65Aは、第1楽曲の高周波帯域、第1楽曲の中周波帯域及び第1楽曲の低周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルが設定済レベルH1lv,M1lv,L1lvであり、かつ、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルが最小レベルL2minである状態にて、フェーダー操作子51が+DC方向に操作されるに従って第2楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルを増加させるとした。フェーダー操作子51が第2範囲RC2に配置されている場合、音量調節部65は、各楽曲の高周波帯域及び各楽曲の中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルが設定済レベルH1lv,M1lv,H2lv,M2lvである状態にて、フェーダー操作子51が+DC方向に操作されるに従って第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを低下させるとともに、第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを増加させるとした。フェーダー操作子51が第3範囲RC3に配置されている場合、音量調節部65は、第2楽曲の高周波帯域、中周波帯域及び低周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルが設定済レベルH2lv,M2lv,L2lvであり、かつ、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルが最小レベルL1minである状態にて、フェーダー操作子51が+DC方向に操作されるに従って第1楽曲の高周波帯域及び前記第1楽曲の中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルを低下させるとした。
 しかしながら、これに限らず、操作可能範囲RCは、より多くの範囲に区分されていてもよい。例えば、第1楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルを増減させる範囲と、第1楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルを増減させる範囲とは互いに別に設けられていてもよい。同様に、第2楽曲の高周波帯域の音量レベルを増減させる範囲と、第2楽曲の中周波帯域の音量レベルを増減させる範囲とは互いに別に設けられていてもよい。
In the second embodiment, when the fader operator 51 is arranged in the first range RC1, the volume adjustment section 65A controls the high frequency band of the first song, the middle frequency band of the first song, and the low frequency band of the first song. The fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction in a state where the volume level of each band is the set level H1lv, M1lv, L1lv, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the second music is the minimum level L2min. The volume level of each of the high frequency band and the medium frequency band of the second song is increased as the frequency increases. When the fader operator 51 is arranged in the second range RC2, the volume adjustment section 65 adjusts the volume levels of the high frequency band of each song and the medium frequency band of each song to the preset levels H1lv, M1lv, H2lv, M2lv. In this state, as the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction, the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song is decreased, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the second song is increased. When the fader operator 51 is arranged in the third range RC3, the volume adjustment section 65 adjusts the volume level of each of the high frequency band, medium frequency band, and low frequency band of the second music to the preset levels H2lv, M2lv, L2lv. And in a state where the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song is the minimum level L1min, as the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction, the high frequency band of the first song and the inside of the first song are The idea is to reduce the volume level of each frequency band.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operable range RC may be divided into more ranges. For example, a range for increasing/decreasing the volume level of the high frequency band of the first song and a range for increasing/decreasing the volume level of the medium frequency band of the first song may be provided separately from each other. Similarly, the range for increasing/decreasing the volume level of the high frequency band of the second song and the range for increasing/decreasing the volume level of the medium frequency band of the second song may be provided separately from each other.
 上記第2実施形態では、第1範囲RC1は、第1端部TC1から操作可能範囲RCにおける1/3の範囲であり、第2範囲RC2は、第2位置PC2から操作可能範囲RCにおける1/3の範囲であり、第3範囲RC3は、第3位置PC3から操作可能範囲RCにおける1/3の範囲であるとした。すなわち、各範囲RC1~RC3は、操作可能範囲RCにおいて均等に分けられた範囲であるとした。しかしながら、これに限らず、第1範囲RC1、第2範囲RC2及び第3範囲RC3のうちの1つの範囲は、他の範囲よりも大きい範囲であってもよい。 In the second embodiment, the first range RC1 is 1/3 of the operable range RC from the first end TC1, and the second range RC2 is 1/3 of the operable range RC from the second position PC2. 3, and the third range RC3 is 1/3 of the operable range RC from the third position PC3. In other words, each of the ranges RC1 to RC3 is an equally divided range in the operable range RC. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and one of the first range RC1, second range RC2, and third range RC3 may be larger than the other ranges.
 上記第2実施形態では、アシストモードにおいて第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの音量が調節される第2範囲RC2では、第1楽曲の高周波帯域、第1楽曲の中周波帯域、第2楽曲の高周波帯域、及び、第2楽曲の中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルは、設定済レベルH1lv,M1lv,H2lv,M2lvで維持されるとした。しかしながら、これに限らず、第1楽曲の高周波帯域、第1楽曲の中周波帯域、第2楽曲の高周波帯域、及び、第2楽曲の中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルは、所定の音量レベルで維持されてもよい。また例えば、フェーダー操作子51が+DC方向に操作されるときに、第2楽曲の高周波帯域及び第2楽曲の中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルが設定済レベルH2lv,M2lvに達する前に第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルが増加し始めてもよく、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルが最小レベルL1minに達する前に第1楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルが低下し始めてもよい。第1操作子33A1及び第2操作子33B1が操作された場合も同様である。 In the second embodiment, in the second range RC2 in which the volume of each of the first song and the second song is adjusted in the assist mode, the high frequency band of the first song, the middle frequency band of the first song, the middle frequency band of the second song, It is assumed that the respective volume levels of the high frequency band and the medium frequency band of the second song are maintained at the preset levels H1lv, M1lv, H2lv, and M2lv. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the volume level of each of the high frequency band of the first song, the medium frequency band of the first song, the high frequency band of the second song, and the medium frequency band of the second song may be set at a predetermined volume level. May be maintained. Further, for example, when the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction, the volume level of each of the high frequency band of the second song and the medium frequency band of the second song reaches the preset levels H2lv, M2lv. The volume level of the low frequency band of the first music piece may start to increase, and the volume level of each of the high frequency band and the middle frequency band of the first music piece may decrease before the volume level of the low frequency band of the first music piece reaches the minimum level L1min. You can start. The same applies when the first operator 33A1 and the second operator 33B1 are operated.
 上記各実施形態では、フェーダー操作子51が操作可能範囲RCにおける第1端部TC1に到達すると、BPM設定部66は、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMを第1楽曲のBPMとし、第2端部TC2に到達すると、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの再生時BPMを第2楽曲のBPMとした。しかしながら、+DC方向にフェーダー操作子51が操作されたときに各楽曲の再生時BPMが第2楽曲のBPMとなるときのフェーダー操作子51の位置は、第2端部TC2でなくてもよく、第2端部TC2よりも-DC方向の位置であってもよい。同様に、-DC方向にフェーダー操作子51が操作されたときに各楽曲の再生時BPMが第1楽曲のBPMとなるときのフェーダー操作子51の位置は、第1端部TC1でなくてもよく、第1端部TC1よりも+DC方向の位置であってもよい。
 第1操作子33A1及び第2操作子33B1が第1端部TA1,TB1及び第2端部TA2,TB2に操作された場合も同様である。
In each of the above embodiments, when the fader operator 51 reaches the first end TC1 in the operable range RC, the BPM setting unit 66 sets the BPM of the first music and the second music at the time of playback to the BPM of the first music. When the second end TC2 is reached, the BPM of each of the first music piece and the second music piece is set as the BPM of the second music piece. However, the position of the fader operator 51 when the BPM of each song becomes the BPM of the second song when the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction does not have to be the second end TC2. The position may be in the -DC direction relative to the second end TC2. Similarly, when the fader operator 51 is operated in the -DC direction, the position of the fader operator 51 when the BPM of each song becomes the BPM of the first song does not have to be at the first end TC1. Often, the position may be in the +DC direction relative to the first end TC1.
The same applies when the first operator 33A1 and the second operator 33B1 are operated at the first end TA1, TB1 and the second end TA2, TB2.
 上記各実施形態では、フェーダー操作子51が操作可能範囲RCにおける第1端部TC1に到達すると、第2楽曲全体の音量を第2最小音量V2minにし、第2端部TC2に到達すると、第1楽曲全体の音量を第1最小音量V1minにするとした。しかしながら、+DC方向にフェーダー操作子51が操作されたときに第1楽曲全体の音量が第1最小音量V1minとなるときのフェーダー操作子51の位置は、第2端部TC2でなくてもよく、第2端部TC2よりも-DC方向の位置であってもよい。同様に、-DC方向にフェーダー操作子51が操作されたときに第2楽曲全体の音量が第2最小音量V2minとなるときのフェーダー操作子51の位置は、第1端部TC1でなくてもよく、第1端部TC1よりも+DC方向の位置であってもよい。
 また、フェーダー操作子51が操作可能範囲RCにおける第1端部TC1に到達したときに、第2楽曲全体の音量を第2最小音量V2minとしなくてもよく、第2端部TC2に到達したときに、第1楽曲全体の音量を第1最小音量V1minとしなくてもよい。
 第1操作子33A1及び第2操作子33B1が第1端部TA1,TB1及び第2端部TA2,TB2に操作された場合も同様である。
In each of the above embodiments, when the fader operator 51 reaches the first end TC1 in the operable range RC, the volume of the entire second music piece is set to the second minimum volume V2min, and when the fader operator 51 reaches the second end TC2, the first end TC1 is set to the second minimum volume V2min. The volume of the entire song was set to the first minimum volume V1min. However, the position of the fader operator 51 when the volume of the entire first song reaches the first minimum volume V1min when the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction may not be at the second end TC2. The position may be in the -DC direction relative to the second end TC2. Similarly, the position of the fader operator 51 when the volume of the entire second song reaches the second minimum volume V2min when the fader operator 51 is operated in the -DC direction does not have to be at the first end TC1. Often, the position may be in the +DC direction relative to the first end TC1.
Furthermore, when the fader operator 51 reaches the first end TC1 in the operable range RC, the volume of the entire second music piece does not have to be set to the second minimum volume V2min, and when the fader operator 51 reaches the second end TC2. Furthermore, the volume of the entire first music piece may not be set to the first minimum volume V1min.
The same applies when the first operator 33A1 and the second operator 33B1 are operated at the first end TA1, TB1 and the second end TA2, TB2.
 上記各実施形態では、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルが最小レベルL1minになる第3位置PC3から更に+DC方向にフェーダー操作子51が操作されると、第1楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルを下げるとした。しかしながら、これに限らず、上記のように、第3位置PC3よりも-DC方向の位置から+DC方向にフェーダー操作子51が操作されると、第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルだけでなく、第1楽曲の高周波帯域及び中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルを低下させてもよい。第2楽曲の各周波数帯域の音量レベルについても同様であり、第1操作子33A1及び第2操作子33B1が操作された場合も同様である。 In each of the above embodiments, when the fader operator 51 is further operated in the +DC direction from the third position PC3 where the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song reaches the minimum level L1min, the high frequency band and medium frequency of the first song I decided to lower the volume level of each band. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as described above, when the fader operator 51 is operated in the +DC direction from a position in the -DC direction relative to the third position PC3, not only the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song but also , the volume level of each of the high frequency band and medium frequency band of the first music may be reduced. The same applies to the volume level of each frequency band of the second music, and the same applies when the first operator 33A1 and the second operator 33B1 are operated.
 上記各実施形態では、コンピューターである演算処理回路によって読み出されて実行される音響制御プログラムは、図示しない記憶部に記憶されているとした。しかしながら、これに限らず、音響制御プログラムは、コンピューター読取可能に記録媒体に記録され、音響制御装置1の動作時に記録媒体から読み出されて実行されてもよい。
 また、音響制御プログラムは、サーバー等の提供機器から、インターネット等のネットワークを介して提供されてもよい。
In each of the embodiments described above, the sound control program read and executed by the arithmetic processing circuit that is a computer is stored in a storage unit (not shown). However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the sound control program may be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium, and may be read from the recording medium and executed when the sound control device 1 is operated.
Further, the acoustic control program may be provided from a providing device such as a server via a network such as the Internet.
 [本発明のまとめ]
 以下、本発明のまとめを付記する。
 [1]第1楽曲と第2楽曲とをミキシングする音響制御装置は、
 ユーザーによって操作される操作子の位置に応じて、前記第1楽曲の音量と前記第2楽曲の音量とのバランスを調節する音量調節部と、
 前記操作子の位置に応じて、前記第1楽曲の再生時BPMと前記第2楽曲の再生時BPMとを設定するBPM設定部と、を備える。
 このような構成によれば、操作子に対するユーザーの操作に応じて、各楽曲の音量調節と再生時BPMの設定とを同時に行うことができる。すなわち、ユーザーが操作子を操作することによって、各楽曲の音量及び再生時BPMの調節を実施できる。従って、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とを違和感なく容易にミキシングできる。
[Summary of the present invention]
Below, a summary of the present invention will be added.
[1] A sound control device that mixes the first music and the second music,
a volume adjustment unit that adjusts the balance between the volume of the first song and the volume of the second song according to the position of an operator operated by the user;
A BPM setting section is provided that sets a BPM when the first music piece is played and a BPM when the second music piece is played back, depending on the position of the operator.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to simultaneously adjust the volume of each song and set the BPM during playback according to the user's operation on the operator. That is, the user can adjust the volume of each song and the BPM during playback by operating the controls. Therefore, the first music piece and the second music piece can be easily mixed without any discomfort.
 [2][1]に記載の音響制御装置において、
 前記音量調節部は、前記操作子の操作可能範囲における第1端部から第2端部に向かう方向に前記操作子が操作されるに従って、前記第1楽曲の音量を低下させ、前記第2楽曲の音量を増加させ、
 前記BPM設定部は、前記第1端部から前記第2端部に向かう方向に前記操作子が操作されるに従って、前記第1楽曲の再生時BPM及び前記第2楽曲の再生時BPMを、前記第1楽曲のBPMから前記第2楽曲のBPMに近づける。
 このような構成によれば、音響制御装置から出力される楽曲を第1楽曲から第2楽曲に入れ替える場合に、操作子を第1端部から第2端部に向かう方向に操作することによって、第1楽曲の音量を低下させ、第2楽曲の音量を増加させるとともに、第1楽曲の再生時BPM及び第2楽曲の再生時BPMを、音量が増加する第2楽曲のBPMに近づけることができる。従って、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とを違和感なく容易にミキシングできる。
[2] In the sound control device according to [1],
The volume adjustment section lowers the volume of the first music piece as the operator is operated in a direction from a first end to a second end in an operable range of the operator, and decreases the volume of the first music piece. increase the volume of
The BPM setting section sets the BPM at the time of reproduction of the first music and the BPM at the time of reproduction of the second music as the operator is operated in a direction from the first end toward the second end. The BPM of the first song is brought closer to the BPM of the second song.
According to such a configuration, when changing the music output from the sound control device from the first music to the second music, by operating the operator in the direction from the first end toward the second end, The volume of the first song can be decreased and the volume of the second song can be increased, and the BPM of the first song and the BPM of the second song can be brought closer to the BPM of the second song whose volume increases. . Therefore, the first music piece and the second music piece can be easily mixed without any discomfort.
 [3][2]に記載の音響制御装置において、
 前記音量調節部は、前記操作子が前記第2端部に配置されると、前記第1楽曲の音量を最小値とし、前記第2楽曲の音量を最大値とし、
 前記BPM設定部は、前記操作子が前記第2端部に配置されると、前記第1楽曲の再生時BPMと前記第2楽曲の再生時BPMとを、前記第2楽曲のBPMに設定する。
 このような構成によれば、操作子が第2端部に配置された場合に、音量が最大値となる第2楽曲の再生時BPMに、第2楽曲のBPMを設定できる。従って、第1楽曲から第2楽曲に入れ替えたときに、第2楽曲のBPMにて第2楽曲を再生できる。
[3] In the sound control device according to [2],
The volume adjustment section sets the volume of the first song to a minimum value and the volume of the second song to a maximum value when the operator is placed at the second end,
When the operator is placed at the second end, the BPM setting unit sets the BPM when playing the first song and the BPM when playing the second song to the BPM of the second song. .
According to such a configuration, when the operator is disposed at the second end, the BPM of the second music piece can be set to the BPM when the second music piece is played back at which the volume becomes the maximum value. Therefore, when replacing the first song with the second song, the second song can be played back at the BPM of the second song.
 [4][1]から[3]のいずれか1つに記載の音響制御装置において、
 前記BPM設定部は、前記操作子が前記操作子の操作可能範囲における中間位置に配置されると、前記第1楽曲の再生時BPM及び前記第2楽曲の再生時BPMのそれぞれを、前記第1楽曲のBPMと前記第2楽曲のBPMとの中間値に設定する。
 このような構成によれば、操作子の操作可能範囲において第1楽曲の再生時BPMと第2楽曲の再生時BPMとが上記中間値となる位置をユーザーが把握しやすくすることができる。従って、再生時BPMの調節時に操作子を操作しやすくすることができる。
[4] In the sound control device according to any one of [1] to [3],
When the operator is placed at an intermediate position in the operable range of the operator, the BPM setting unit sets each of the playback BPM of the first music piece and the playback BPM of the second music piece to the first music piece. The BPM of the music is set to an intermediate value between the BPM of the music and the BPM of the second music.
According to such a configuration, it is possible for the user to easily grasp the position where the BPM at the time of reproduction of the first music and the BPM at the time of reproduction of the second music have the above-mentioned intermediate value in the operable range of the operator. Therefore, the operator can be easily operated when adjusting the BPM during playback.
 [5][1]から[4]のいずれか一項に記載の音響制御装置において、
 前記操作子の操作可能範囲における第1端部から第2端部に向かう方向を第1操作方向としたとき、
 前記操作可能範囲は、
  第1位置と、前記第1位置に対して前記第1操作方向に位置する第2位置との間の第1範囲と、
  前記第2位置と、前記第2位置に対して前記第1操作方向に位置する第3位置との間の第2範囲と、
  前記第3位置と、前記第3位置に対して前記第1操作方向に位置する第4位置との間の第3範囲と、を含み、
 前記BPM設定部は、前記操作子が前記第1操作方向に移動されるに従って、前記第1楽曲の再生時BPM及び前記第2楽曲の再生時BPMを前記第2楽曲のBPMに近づける。
 このような構成によれば、第2楽曲のBPMに近づくように、各楽曲の再生時BPMを変化させることができる。従って、各楽曲の再生時BPMを第2楽曲のBPMに近づけるときの操作を簡略化できる。
[5] In the sound control device according to any one of [1] to [4],
When the direction from the first end to the second end in the operable range of the operator is defined as a first operation direction,
The operable range is
a first range between a first position and a second position located in the first operating direction with respect to the first position;
a second range between the second position and a third position located in the first operating direction with respect to the second position;
a third range between the third position and a fourth position located in the first operating direction with respect to the third position;
The BPM setting unit brings the BPM of the first music piece and the second music piece closer to the BPM of the second music piece as the operator is moved in the first operation direction.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the BPM of each song during playback so that it approaches the BPM of the second song. Therefore, the operation for bringing the BPM of each song closer to the BPM of the second song during reproduction can be simplified.
 [6][5]に記載の音響制御装置において、
 前記BPM設定部は、前記操作子が前記第2範囲に配置されている場合、前記第1楽曲の再生時BPM及び前記第2楽曲の再生時BPMを変更しない。
 このような構成によれば、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とのそれぞれが耳に入りやすい第2範囲に操作子が配置されている場合に、各楽曲の再生時BPMを変更しないことによって、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とを違和感なく容易にミキシングできる。
[6] In the sound control device according to [5],
The BPM setting unit does not change the BPM at the time of reproduction of the first music and the BPM at the time of reproduction of the second music, when the operator is arranged in the second range.
According to such a configuration, when the controls are arranged in the second range where each of the first music piece and the second music piece can be easily heard, the BPM of the first music piece and the second music piece can be easily heard by not changing the BPM. To easily mix one song and a second song without feeling any discomfort.
 [7][5]又は[6]に記載の音響制御装置において、
 前記音量調節部は、前記操作子が前記第2範囲に配置されている場合、前記第1楽曲の高周波帯域、前記第1楽曲の中周波帯域、前記第2楽曲の高周波帯域及び前記第2楽曲の中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルが最大レベルである状態にて、前記操作子が前記第1操作方向に操作されるに従って前記第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを低下させるとともに、前記第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを増加させる。
 このような構成によれば、第1楽曲及び第2楽曲のそれぞれの低周波成分の合計音量を、各低周波成分のミックス前の合計音量と同程度に維持できる。これにより、周波数を調整せずに第1楽曲全体と第2楽曲全体とをミックスする場合に比べて、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とのミックス中に低周波成分が強く聞こえることを抑制できる。また、各楽曲は、中間値のBPMにて再生されるので、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とを違和感なくミックスできる。
[7] In the sound control device according to [5] or [6],
When the operator is arranged in the second range, the volume adjustment section includes a high frequency band of the first music, a medium frequency band of the first music, a high frequency band of the second music, and a high frequency band of the second music. While the volume level of each of the medium frequency bands is at the maximum level, as the operator is operated in the first operation direction, the volume level of the low frequency band of the first music piece is decreased, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the first music is decreased, 2 Increase the volume level of the low frequency band of the song.
According to such a configuration, the total volume of the low frequency components of each of the first music piece and the second music piece can be maintained at the same level as the total volume of each low frequency component before mixing. Thereby, compared to the case where the entire first music piece and the entire second music piece are mixed without adjusting the frequency, it is possible to suppress the low frequency components from being heard strongly during the mixing of the first music piece and the second music piece. Furthermore, since each song is played at an intermediate BPM, the first song and the second song can be mixed without any discomfort.
 [8][5]から[7]のいずれか1つに記載の音響制御装置において、
 前記第1位置は、前記第1端部であり、
 前記第4位置は、前記第2端部であり、
 前記第1範囲は、前記第1端部から前記操作可能範囲における1/3の範囲であり、
 前記第2範囲は、前記第2位置から前記操作可能範囲における1/3の範囲であり、
 前記第3範囲は、前記第3位置から前記操作可能範囲における1/3の範囲である。
 このような構成によれば、ユーザーが第1範囲、第2範囲及び第3範囲のそれぞれの位置を直感的に把握できる。従って、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とをミックスするときの操作子の操作を実施しやすくすることができる。
[8] In the sound control device according to any one of [5] to [7],
the first position is the first end;
the fourth position is the second end;
The first range is 1/3 of the operable range from the first end,
The second range is 1/3 of the operable range from the second position,
The third range is one third of the operable range from the third position.
According to such a configuration, the user can intuitively grasp the respective positions of the first range, the second range, and the third range. Therefore, it is possible to easily operate the operator when mixing the first music and the second music.
 [9][1]から[8]のいずれか一項に記載の音響制御装置において、
 前記操作子は、スライド可能なフェーダー操作子を有するクロスフェーダーである。
 このような構成によれば、操作子を操作することによって、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とを違和感なくミックスできる。従って、第1楽曲の再生時BPMを調節する操作子と、第2楽曲の再生時BPMを調節する操作子とを操作する場合に比べて、第1楽曲と第2楽曲とのミックス操作を容易に実施できる。
[9] In the sound control device according to any one of [1] to [8],
The operator is a crossfader having a slideable fader operator.
According to such a configuration, by operating the operator, the first music piece and the second music piece can be mixed without any discomfort. Therefore, the mixing operation between the first and second songs is easier than when operating the operator that adjusts the BPM when playing the first song and the operator that adjusts the BPM when playing the second song. can be implemented.
 [10]音響制御プログラムは、コンピューター読取可能に記録され、コンピューターを[1]から[9]のいずれか一項に記載の音響制御装置として機能させる。
 このような音響制御プログラムをコンピューターに実行させることによって、上記した音響制御装置と同様の効果を奏することができる。
[10] The sound control program is recorded in a computer-readable manner and causes the computer to function as the sound control device according to any one of [1] to [9].
By causing a computer to execute such a sound control program, the same effects as the above-described sound control device can be achieved.
 1…音響制御装置、33A…第1チャンネルフェーダー、33A1…第1操作子(操作子)、33B…第2チャンネルフェーダー、33B1…第2操作子(操作子)、5…クロスフェーダー、51…フェーダー操作子(操作子)、6,6A,6B…制御部、61…第1再生部、62…第2再生部、63…位置取得部、64…モード切替部、65,65A…音量調節部、66…BPM設定部、67…操作判定部、68…再生制御部、69…位置設定部、70…位置選択部、PA1…位置、PB1…位置、PC1…第1位置、PC2…第2位置、PC3…第3位置、PC4…第4位置、RA,RB,RC…操作可能範囲、RA1,RB1,RC1…第1範囲、RA2,RB2,RC2…第2範囲、RC3…第3範囲、TC1…第1端部、TC2…第2端部、+DC…方向(第1操作方向)。 1... Sound control device, 33A... 1st channel fader, 33A1... 1st operator (controller), 33B... 2nd channel fader, 33B1... 2nd operator (controller), 5... Cross fader, 51... Fader Operator (operator), 6, 6A, 6B...control unit, 61...first playback unit, 62...second playback unit, 63...position acquisition unit, 64...mode switching unit, 65, 65A...volume adjustment unit, 66... BPM setting section, 67... Operation determination section, 68... Playback control section, 69... Position setting section, 70... Position selection section, PA1... Position, PB1... Position, PC1... First position, PC2... Second position, PC3...third position, PC4...fourth position, RA, RB, RC...operable range, RA1, RB1, RC1...first range, RA2, RB2, RC2...second range, RC3...third range, TC1... First end, TC2... second end, +DC... direction (first operating direction).

Claims (10)

  1.  第1楽曲と第2楽曲とをミキシングする音響制御装置において、
     ユーザーによって操作される操作子の位置に応じて、前記第1楽曲の音量と前記第2楽曲の音量とのバランスを調節する音量調節部と、
     前記操作子の位置に応じて、前記第1楽曲の再生時BPMと前記第2楽曲の再生時BPMとを設定するBPM設定部と、を備える、ことを特徴とする音響制御装置。
    In a sound control device that mixes a first song and a second song,
    a volume adjustment unit that adjusts the balance between the volume of the first song and the volume of the second song according to the position of an operator operated by the user;
    A sound control device comprising: a BPM setting section that sets a BPM when playing the first music and a BPM when playing the second music according to the position of the operator.
  2.  請求項1に記載の音響制御装置において、
     前記音量調節部は、前記操作子の操作可能範囲における第1端部から第2端部に向かう方向に前記操作子が操作されるに従って、前記第1楽曲の音量を低下させ、前記第2楽曲の音量を増加させ、
     前記BPM設定部は、前記第1端部から前記第2端部に向かう方向に前記操作子が操作されるに従って、前記第1楽曲の再生時BPM及び前記第2楽曲の再生時BPMを、前記第1楽曲のBPMから前記第2楽曲のBPMに近づける、ことを特徴とする音響制御装置。
    The sound control device according to claim 1,
    The volume adjustment section lowers the volume of the first music piece as the operator is operated in a direction from a first end to a second end in an operable range of the operator, and decreases the volume of the first music piece. increase the volume of
    The BPM setting section sets the BPM at the time of reproduction of the first music and the BPM at the time of reproduction of the second music as the operator is operated in a direction from the first end toward the second end. A sound control device characterized in that the BPM of the first music piece is brought closer to the BPM of the second music piece.
  3.  請求項2に記載の音響制御装置において、
     前記音量調節部は、前記操作子が前記第2端部に配置されると、前記第1楽曲の音量を最小値とし、前記第2楽曲の音量を最大値とし、
     前記BPM設定部は、前記操作子が前記第2端部に配置されると、前記第1楽曲の再生時BPMと前記第2楽曲の再生時BPMとを、前記第2楽曲のBPMに設定する、ことを特徴とする音響制御装置。
    The sound control device according to claim 2,
    The volume adjustment section sets the volume of the first song to a minimum value and the volume of the second song to a maximum value when the operator is placed at the second end,
    When the operator is placed at the second end, the BPM setting unit sets the BPM when playing the first song and the BPM when playing the second song to the BPM of the second song. , a sound control device characterized by:
  4.  請求項1から請求項3のいずれか一項に記載の音響制御装置において、
     前記BPM設定部は、前記操作子が前記操作子の操作可能範囲における中間位置に配置されると、前記第1楽曲の再生時BPM及び前記第2楽曲の再生時BPMのそれぞれを、前記第1楽曲のBPMと前記第2楽曲のBPMとの中間値に設定する、ことを特徴とする音響制御装置。
    The sound control device according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
    When the operator is placed at an intermediate position in the operable range of the operator, the BPM setting unit sets each of the playback BPM of the first music piece and the playback BPM of the second music piece to the first music piece. A sound control device characterized in that the BPM of the music is set to an intermediate value between the BPM of the music and the BPM of the second music.
  5.  請求項1に記載の音響制御装置において、
     前記操作子の操作可能範囲における第1端部から第2端部に向かう方向を第1操作方向としたとき、
     前記操作可能範囲は、
      第1位置と、前記第1位置に対して前記第1操作方向に位置する第2位置との間の第1範囲と、
      前記第2位置と、前記第2位置に対して前記第1操作方向に位置する第3位置との間の第2範囲と、
      前記第3位置と、前記第3位置に対して前記第1操作方向に位置する第4位置との間の第3範囲と、を含み、
     前記BPM設定部は、前記操作子が前記第1操作方向に移動されるに従って、前記第1楽曲の再生時BPM及び前記第2楽曲の再生時BPMを前記第2楽曲のBPMに近づける、ことを特徴とする音響制御装置。
    The sound control device according to claim 1,
    When the direction from the first end to the second end in the operable range of the operator is defined as a first operation direction,
    The operable range is
    a first range between a first position and a second position located in the first operating direction with respect to the first position;
    a second range between the second position and a third position located in the first operating direction with respect to the second position;
    a third range between the third position and a fourth position located in the first operating direction with respect to the third position;
    The BPM setting unit is configured to bring the BPM when playing the first song and the BPM when playing the second song closer to the BPM of the second song as the operator is moved in the first operation direction. Features a sound control device.
  6.  請求項5に記載の音響制御装置において、
     前記BPM設定部は、前記操作子が前記第2範囲に配置されている場合、前記第1楽曲の再生時BPM及び前記第2楽曲の再生時BPMを変更しない、ことを特徴とする音響制御装置。
    The sound control device according to claim 5,
    The sound control device is characterized in that the BPM setting unit does not change the BPM when the first song is played and the BPM when the second song is played when the operator is placed in the second range. .
  7.  請求項5又は請求項6に記載の音響制御装置において、
     前記音量調節部は、前記操作子が前記第2範囲に配置されている場合、前記第1楽曲の高周波帯域、前記第1楽曲の中周波帯域、前記第2楽曲の高周波帯域及び前記第2楽曲の中周波帯域のそれぞれの音量レベルが最大レベルである状態にて、前記操作子が前記第1操作方向に操作されるに従って前記第1楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを低下させるとともに、前記第2楽曲の低周波帯域の音量レベルを増加させる、ことを特徴とする音響制御装置。
    The sound control device according to claim 5 or 6,
    When the operator is disposed in the second range, the volume adjustment section includes a high frequency band of the first music, a medium frequency band of the first music, a high frequency band of the second music, and a high frequency band of the second music. While the volume level of each of the medium frequency bands is at the maximum level, as the operator is operated in the first operation direction, the volume level of the low frequency band of the first song is decreased, and the volume level of the low frequency band of the first music is decreased, A sound control device characterized by increasing the volume level of a low frequency band of two songs.
  8.  請求項5又は請求項6に記載の音響制御装置において、
     前記第1位置は、前記第1端部であり、
     前記第4位置は、前記第2端部であり、
     前記第1範囲は、前記第1端部から前記操作可能範囲における1/3の範囲であり、
     前記第2範囲は、前記第2位置から前記操作可能範囲における1/3の範囲であり、
     前記第3範囲は、前記第3位置から前記操作可能範囲における1/3の範囲である、ことを特徴とする音響制御装置。
    The sound control device according to claim 5 or 6,
    the first position is the first end;
    the fourth position is the second end;
    The first range is 1/3 of the operable range from the first end,
    The second range is 1/3 of the operable range from the second position,
    The sound control device is characterized in that the third range is one third of the operable range from the third position.
  9.  請求項1に記載の音響制御装置において、
     前記操作子は、スライド可能なフェーダー操作子を有するクロスフェーダーである、ことを特徴とする音響制御装置。
    The sound control device according to claim 1,
    The sound control device is characterized in that the operator is a crossfader having a slideable fader operator.
  10.  コンピューター読取可能に記録され、コンピューターを請求項1に記載の音響制御装置として機能させる音響制御プログラム。
     
    A sound control program that is recorded in a computer-readable manner and causes a computer to function as the sound control device according to claim 1.
PCT/JP2022/028520 2022-07-22 2022-07-22 Sound control device and sound control program WO2024018632A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2022/028520 WO2024018632A1 (en) 2022-07-22 2022-07-22 Sound control device and sound control program

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2022/028520 WO2024018632A1 (en) 2022-07-22 2022-07-22 Sound control device and sound control program

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024018632A1 true WO2024018632A1 (en) 2024-01-25

Family

ID=89617425

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2022/028520 WO2024018632A1 (en) 2022-07-22 2022-07-22 Sound control device and sound control program

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2024018632A1 (en)

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2006279733A (en) * 2005-03-30 2006-10-12 Yamaha Corp Tempo signal output device, and audio mixing device

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2006279733A (en) * 2005-03-30 2006-10-12 Yamaha Corp Tempo signal output device, and audio mixing device

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5919683B2 (en) Multi-track recorder device
JP4180249B2 (en) Audio signal processing device
JP2008514098A (en) Multi-channel audio control
JP3736971B2 (en) Audio signal processing device
WO2024018632A1 (en) Sound control device and sound control program
JP4441035B2 (en) Audio mixer
WO2024018631A1 (en) Acoustic control device and acoustic control program
JP2024014552A (en) Acoustic control device and acoustic control program
WO2024024104A1 (en) Audio control device and audio control program
JP7375003B2 (en) Sound equipment and sound reproduction programs
WO2022230171A1 (en) Acoustic device, acoustic device control method, and program
JP7521002B2 (en) Audio equipment, and method and program for controlling audio equipment
WO2024171354A1 (en) Acoustic device, acoustic device control method, and program
WO2023062722A1 (en) Acoustic device, acoustic device control method and program
JP7375004B2 (en) Sound equipment and sound reproduction programs
WO2022054263A1 (en) Acoustic apparatus
CA3163435C (en) Fade device
TWM558506U (en) Sound output auxiliary device for audio mixer
JP7522853B2 (en) AUDIO EQUIPMENT, METHOD AND PROGRAM FOR CONTROLLING PLAYBACK OF AUDIO EQUIPMENT
WO2023062721A1 (en) Acoustic device, acoustic device control method and program
US20240046963A1 (en) Fade device
JPWO2019130596A1 (en) Sound reproduction control device
WO2023021602A1 (en) Sound data processing device, sound data processing method, and program
WO2023021603A1 (en) Audio data processing device, audio data processing method, and program
WO2007125990A1 (en) Slide operator, information processing device and method, and computer program

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22952016

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1